JP6503154B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention performs a fluctuation display based on establishment of start conditions, to migratable gaming machine to an advantageous beneficial conditions for Yu technique's.

  Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the display mode changes when the display mode of the hold display is changed according to the determined game content and the display mode is changed. It is known to perform pre-notification effect (fall of parachute) to inform the player in advance.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-015006

  However, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, even if the foreknowledge effect is performed, since the display mode of the hold display changes to only one type, it is poor to attract the player's interest.

  The present invention has been made under such background, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of attracting a player's interest to a notice changing a display mode of a hold display.

  The present invention adopts the following means in order to solve the problems. The reference numerals used in the description of the best mode for carrying out the invention described later and the drawings are appended in parentheses for reference, but the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to the appended ones.

First, the invention according to means 1 is
The variable display is performed based on the establishment of the start condition (that neither the variable display of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is executed, nor the big hit gaming state), and the advantageous state advantageous to the player ( Gaming machine that can shift to the jackpot gaming state),
Holding storage means (a first holding storage buffer and a second holding storage buffer shown in FIG. 20 (B)) for storing information on a variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied as a holding storage;
Whether the variable display has a predetermined result (big hit) or not and the variable display has a predetermined pattern (super reach) before the start condition is satisfied, and the winning combination in S1217 or S1228 A game control microcomputer 560) that performs time effect processing;
Hold display control means (total hold storage display unit 18c of effect display device 9) for displaying the hold display corresponding to the hold storage in a predetermined display mode;
Based on the determination result of the determination means, a first advance notice effect (color change of the suspension display) for giving a notice that there is a possibility of the predetermined result and a second for giving a notice that there is a possibility of the predetermined pattern With regard to the notice effect (the shape change of the hold display), the notice effect executing means to be executed before the start condition of the fluctuation display which is the target of the judgment by the judgment means is satisfied 100) and,
The preview effect execution means is:
Regarding the fluctuation display performed before the start condition of the fluctuation display which is the target of the judgment by the judgment means is satisfied, whether or not a period from the start to the end of the fluctuation display satisfies a predetermined condition or not When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first holding effect (FIG. 60: small with brush 1110 and bucket 1120) for the normal-state holding display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the judgment by the judging means when the predetermined condition is satisfied. An effect of changing the display mode of the hold display from the normal mode to the first display mode by executing the person 1100 or the giant 1200) is performed as the first preview effect (FIG. 62 (a): no change, blue) ,Red),
Performing a first suggestion effect that suggests that the first preview effect is to be executed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and performing the first preview effect in a variable display that satisfies a predetermined condition to be executed thereafter Is possible,
Regarding the fluctuation display performed before the start condition of the fluctuation display which is the target of the judgment by the judgment means is satisfied, whether or not a period from the start to the end of the fluctuation display satisfies a predetermined condition or not When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the second holding effect (FIG. 61: a small person 1100 with a hammer 1210 or the like with respect to the holding display in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display targeted for the judgment by the judgment means) An effect of changing the display mode of the pending display from the normal mode to the second display mode by executing the giant 1200) is executed as the second advance presentation effect (FIG. 62 (b): not split, split)
Performing a second suggestion effect that suggests that the second preliminary effect is to be performed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and performing the second preliminary effect in a variable display that satisfies a predetermined condition to be performed thereafter Is possible,
Even if the first hold effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not change to the first display mode.
Even if the second hold effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not change to the second display mode.
It is a game machine characterized by.
The gaming machine of means 1 is
Determination information capable of specifying at least one of whether or not the predetermined result and the predetermined pattern are obtained before the start condition is satisfied, and pending storage information indicating that the pending storage has increased Information transmitting means for transmitting;
Even when the determination information is properly received, the first preview effect and the first notification effect can be obtained when the pending storage information including at least the pending storage information can not be normally received. 2) An effect limiting means for restricting the execution of the advance effect may be provided.

The invention according to means 2 is
The gaming machine described in Means 1,
There is a case where the display mode of the hold display is not changed to the first display mode even when the first hold effect is executed (FIG. 62 (a): no change, blue change, red change). May be),
The first hold effect has a plurality of types of effects different in the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display to the first display mode (FIG. 59 (c): appearance of a dwarf having a low holding ball change expectation) And, with the emergence of giants with high expectations for change of holding ball),
The advance notice effect executing means executes any one of the plurality of types of first hold effects based on the fact that it has been determined that the first notice effect is to be performed (a dwarf person or It is a game machine characterized by having a giant appear.

Also, the invention according to means 3 is
The first display mode has a plurality of display modes different in the degree of expectation to be in the first state (FIG. 59 (a): no change with a low probability of big hit, and a blue change with a medium level of big hit) And there is a red change that has a high expectation for a big hit),
The first hold effect has a plurality of types of effects having different proportions of changing the display mode of the hold display to each of the plurality of first display modes (FIG. 59 (c): Hold ball change expectation degree is With the appearance of a low dwarf and the appearance of a giant with a high expectation for holding ball change),
The advance notice effect executing means executes any one of the plurality of types of first hold effects based on the fact that it has been determined that the first notice effect is to be performed (a dwarf person or It is a game machine characterized by having a giant appear.
Here, the “expected degree” means that the proportion selected when not in the first state is different from the proportion selected when in the first state.

Also, the invention according to means 4 is
The gaming machine described in the means 2 or 3,
When changing the display mode of the hold display to the first display mode, the advance notice effect execution means executes one hold effect of the plurality of first hold effects, and then executes another hold effect. It is a gaming machine characterized by being possible (FIG. 63: change from painting on dwarf with A12, A21 to painting on a giant).

The invention according to means 5 is
The second hold effect has a plurality of types of effects (FIG. 61: a small person 1100 with a hammer 1210 or a giant 1200 appears),
When changing the display mode of the on-hold display to the first display mode, the preliminary rendering effect execution means performs one on-hold rendering of the plurality of types of second on-hold effects, and then executes the plurality of first on-off effects. It is a gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing one of the holding effects of the holding effects (FIG. 63: change from dividing a dwarf by A22 to painting with a giant).

The invention according to means 6 is
It is a game machine described in any one of the means 1-5,
The preview effect execution means is:
It is possible to change the display mode of the other hold display to the first display mode while changing the display mode of the one hold display to the first display mode,
In the case where the degree of expectation to become the first state indicated by the first display manner in which the other hold indication has changed is lower than the degree of expectation to be the first state indicated by the first display manner in which the one hold indication changes. The game machine is characterized in that the display mode of the other suspension display is not changed to the first display mode (if YES at S6018C, the advance notice effect is not determined and the advance notice effect is not executed). .

  In the above description, the first state is a big hit, and the second state is a super reach. On the contrary, even if the first state is a super reach and the second state is a big hit. good. Furthermore, the first state or the second state may be a state other than the jackpot or the super reach.

  In the above, an example was described in which the first preview effect was the color change of the hold display and the second preview effect was the shape change of the hold display, but conversely, the shape change of the first preview effect was the hold display In this case, the second notice effect may be a color change of the hold display. Furthermore, the first preview effect and the second preview effect may be changes other than color change and shape change.

  First, according to the gaming machine according to the means 1, either of the two types of hold effects (the first hold effect and the second hold effect) is executed when the advance notice effect for changing the display mode of the hold display is performed. The player's interest can be attracted to the notice effect of changing the display mode of the hold display.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the means 2, when executing the first holding effect, one of a plurality of types of first holding effect is executed, in which the ratio of changing the display mode of the holding display to the first display mode is different. As a result, the player can be interested in the type of the first hold effect.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the means 3, when executing the first hold effect, the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display to each of the plurality of types of first display modes different in the degree of expectation to be the first state is Since one of a plurality of different types of first holding effects is executed, the player can be made interested in the types of the first holding effects.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the means 4, since the plurality of types of holding effects are changed stepwise and executed, the player can be interested in the middle of the execution of the holding effects.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the means 5, since the holding effect changes in stages and the holding effect changes from the second holding effect to the first holding effect, the player can be made interested.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the means 6, when the degree of expectation is lower than the first display mode already shown, the change of the display mode of the other suspension display is not performed, so the change of the display mode is complicated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being upset.

  The present invention also aims to provide gaming machines of means 11 to 16 shown below, and the means 11 to 16 are arbitrarily applicable to the means 1 to 6.

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot by a launch device into a game area by a launch device and the game ball is won in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to In addition, a variable display unit capable of variable display (also referred to as "variable display") of identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of identification information in the variable display unit is a specific display result, a predetermined game Some are configured to give value to the player.

  The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in an advantageous state for a player who is easy to hit a ball, or a right for a player to be in an advantageous state. Or the condition for winning the prize ball to be satisfied easily.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, a specific display mode defined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started in the variable display unit based on the game ball having won the start winning opening. When it is done, a "big hit (specific game state)" occurs. In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making a symbol stop display. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a transition is made to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball tends to be won. Then, in each open period, when there is a winning to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that an open time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each open, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the open time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Also, in the variable display section, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and stop in a state of matching with the specific display result. There is a possibility of a big hit before the final result is displayed due to the state of being scaled or deformed, or a plurality of symbols fluctuating in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed. An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, the fluctuation indication including reach production is called reach fluctuation indication. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the fluctuation display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off", and the fluctuation display state ends. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this type of gaming machine, when the game ball is normally started on the starting winning opening provided in the game area, it is immediately determined whether or not to make a big hit or reach based on the starting winning. Instead, each random number value is read out at a timing at which it becomes possible to start variable display based on the start winning combination, and it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or reach.

  On the other hand, in such a gaming machine, before performing the variable display based on the starting winning combination, it is configured to look ahead each random value in advance and determine whether it will be a big hit or reach or not. There is one (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the storage control information indicates that there is a start winning combination (information indicating which identification information of the two identification information has been the start winning combination and the number of pending storages) The command to designate the information indicating the) and the command to designate the judgment result of the pre-reading judgment are sent to the effect control means, and the effect control means performs the big hit before executing the fluctuation display based on the start winning based on the received command. It is comprised so that it may be determined whether advance announcement production | presentation which announces the possibility of generation | occurrence | production of etc. is performed (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-35879).

  In the gaming machine described in this JP-A-2010-35879, a highly reliable advance notice effect according to whether or not it becomes a big hit and whether or not it becomes a reach before executing the variable display based on the starting winning combination. It is possible to However, even if it is not possible to normally receive a part of the command sent at the time of starting winning, it is possible to execute the notice effect, so it is designated by the command which could not be received normally. The notice effect is to be executed based on the information with low credibility, which may lower the reliability of the notice effect.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the notice effect from being lowered in the gaming machine capable of executing the notice effect before executing the variable display based on the starting winning combination. It aims at providing a game machine.

(Means 11) The gaming machine according to the present invention is also referred to as variable display ("variable display") after the game medium (for example, game ball) passes through the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13). Based on the establishment of the start condition of the variable display allowing the start of)) (for example, neither the variable display of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being executed, nor is the jackpot gaming state) A first variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display 8a) for performing variable display of a plurality of types of first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) capable of identifying After the game medium passes through the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening 14), a plurality of types of second identification information (for example, the second special) which can identify each based on the establishment of the start condition To display the results of The second variation display unit (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) to be displayed is provided, and the specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first variation display unit or the second variation display unit. Game control means (for example, a microcomputer 560 for controlling game control) for controlling the progress of the game, which is a game machine for shifting to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player when playing An effect device (for example, effect display device 9) for executing an effect (for example, fluctuation display of effect pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation display in the first fluctuation display portion and the second fluctuation display portion based on the information from the means When the game control means includes the effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) to control, the game control means has passed the first start area or the second start area Numerical data (for example, hardware R random number random R (big hit judgment random number), software random number jackpot type judgment random number (random 1), fluctuation pattern type judgment random number (random 2) and fluctuation pattern judgment Digital data extraction means (for example, the portion executing the steps S1216 and S1227 in the game control microcomputer 560) for extracting the random number (random 3) and the game medium having passed through the first start area The first hold storage unit (for example, FIG. 20) stores the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction unit as the pending storage up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied. Start despite the fact that the game media has passed the first hold storage buffer shown in (B) and the second start area The second hold storage means (for example, FIG. 20 (for example, FIG. 20 (for example, FIG. 20 (see FIG. 20)) stores the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means as the pending storage up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). The second reserve storage buffer shown in B) and the start condition based on the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means are satisfied, the variable display is performed using the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means. Determining means for determining whether or not to be in a predetermined state (for example, super reach) (for example, a portion for executing steps S1217 and S1228 in the gaming control microcomputer 560), the first storage means or the second It is possible to recognize that the pending storage stored by the pending storage means has increased. Hold storage information transmission means (for example, a portion for executing steps S1220, S1221, S1231 and S1232 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) for transmitting the storage number designation command, and determination result information (for example, the determination result of the determination means) , Judgment result information transmission means (for example, a portion executing step S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230 in microcomputer 560 for game control) for transmitting symbol designation command and variation category command), and extracted by numerical data extraction means Starting condition determining means (for example, a game) which determines whether or not the variable display is to be in a predetermined state by using the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extracting means when the start condition based on the numerical data is satisfied Control microcomputer 60 and 60, and the effect control means notifies that there is a possibility of being in a predetermined state based on the determination result information For example, advance notice effect determination means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice advance effect) before the start condition is established based on the numerical data targeted by the determination means. A notice effect executing means (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control) which executes the notice effect based on the step S6011, S6027 and S8010) and the fact that the notice effect determining means determines to execute the notice effect. To execute steps S6016, S6017, and S8108 in In the case where it is not possible to normally receive the pending storage means identification information that can specify which pending storage means among the first pending storage means and the second pending storage means included in the pending storage information has increased In step S6003, for example, when N in steps S6004 and S6006 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control, step S6033 is executed to start a preview advance notice setting restriction period, step S8002, And Y) in step S8003 to execute the step S8005 to end the pre-notice notice setting restriction period). With such a configuration, when the reserve storage means identification information included in the reserve storage information can not be received normally, the execution of the advance notice effect is limited, so the advance notice effect that can be executed before the variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent the reliability of the

(Means 12) In means 11, the suspension storage information transmission unit includes, as suspension storage information, suspension storage unit identification information (for example, start winning combination designation command), a first suspension storage unit, and a second suspension storage unit. Transmits the number of pending storages to be stored (for example, total pending storage number specification command) that can identify the number of pending storages (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1220, S1221, S1231 and S1232 ), The preliminary announcement effect limiting means determines which pending storage means out of the first pending storage means and the second pending storage means based on the received pending storage means identifying information, and the received pending Also when there is a contradiction between the specified result of the number of pending storages stored by the first pending storage means and the second pending storage means based on the storage number specific information Limit the execution of the output (e.g., effect control microcomputer 100, a step S6033 to start the read-ahead notice set restriction period running at N in step S6006) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, the execution of the advance notice effect is limited even when there is a conflict between the identification result based on the suspension storage means identification information and the identification result based on the suspension storage number identification information, so it is possible to carry out before the variable display It is possible to prevent the reduction in the reliability of the final announcement effect.

(Means 13) In the means 11 or the means 12, when it is determined that the judgment means judges that the predetermined state is to be attained, the first effect (for example, It is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect of the countdown ") or the second mode (for example," change in variation pattern at symbol change "," mode transition "), and it is determined that the predetermined state is not made by the determination means If it is specified, it is determined whether or not to perform the advance notice effect of the second mode (for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S6010, S6027, and S8010, FIG. As shown in the figure, for "previous notice effect of" change in variation pattern at symbol change "and" mode transition ", in the case of non-reach out or super reach out Also, the pre-read notice effect of “countdown” may be determined only in the case of a super reach jackpot), and the notice effect executing means is limited to the execution of the notice effect by the notice effect restricting means. Even in the case where there is, it is possible to execute the notice effect of the second mode (for example, when the microcomputer for effect control 100 executes step S6027 using the pre-read notice distribution table C selected in step S6026) As shown in FIG. 41 (C), when non-reach is out, it is possible to execute only step S8108 by determining only the advance notice of “change in change pattern at symbol change” and “mode transition”. It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, with regard to the advance notice effect of the second aspect that is executable both in the case where the predetermined state is achieved and in the case where it is not achieved, it is possible to execute even when the execution of the advance effect is limited. Since the reliability of the advance notice effect that can be executed before the variable display is secured, the appearance frequency of the advance notice effect that can be executed before the variable display can be secured to a certain extent, and the interest for the game is improved. It can be done.

(Means 14) In any of the means 11 to 13, the game control means has made the game medium pass the first start area or the second start area based on the determination result of the start state determination means Fluctuation display execution means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560) for executing the fluctuation display of the first identification information in the first fluctuation display section or the fluctuation display of the second identification information in the second fluctuation display section The portion for executing steps S52 to S54 to execute steps S108, S121, S1125, S1126, S1128, and S3201 to S3204), and the pending storage information transmission means, as pending storage information, pending storage means identification information (for example, , Start winning designation command), the number of pending storages stored by the first pending storage means and the second pending storage means (For example, the microcomputer 560 for game control executes steps S1220, S1221, S1231 and S1232), which can be determined. Is the first mode (for example, "countdown") or the second mode (for example, "when symbol variation", when it is determined that the determination means determines that the predetermined state is to be made based on the determination result information When it is determined whether or not to perform the notice effect of “the change of the fluctuation mode”, “mode transition”), and it is determined that the determination means does not become the predetermined state, the notice of the second mode It is determined whether or not to execute the effect (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S6010, S6027, and S8010). When doing, as shown in FIG. 41, "previous notice effect of" change in change pattern at symbol change "and" mode transition "may be determined in the case of non-reach or super reach, The pre-read advance notice effect of “countdown” may be determined only in the case of a super reach jackpot), and the notice effect execution means may be unable to normally receive hold storage means identification information When the reserved storage number specifying information and the determination result information are normally received, the second-stage preview effect can be executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the pre-read preview distribution selected in step S6026). When performing step S6027 using table C, as shown in FIG. It may be configured such that only the advance notice announcement effect of “change mode of change” or “mode transition” is determined, and step S 8108 can be executed). According to such a configuration, even when the pending storage means identifying information can not be received normally, the predetermined state can be obtained when the pending storage number identifying information and the determination result information are normally received. The second aspect of the notice effect that can be performed in both cases and when it is not possible to be performed, so that it is possible to prevent the reliability of the notice effect that can be performed before the change display is reduced, The appearance frequency of the advance notice effect that can be executed before the variable display can be secured to a certain extent, and the interest for the game can be improved.

(Means 15) In any of the means 11 to the means 14, even when the reserve storage information and the determination result information can not be received in the regular order, the preliminary announcement effect limiting means limits the execution of the preliminary announcement effect (For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step S6033 and start the prefetch notice setting restriction period when N in step S6004). According to such a configuration, the execution of the advance notice effect is limited even when the pending storage information and the determination result information can not be received in the proper order, so that the advance notice effect that can be performed before the variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent the decrease in reliability.

(Means 16) In any of the means 11 to 15, the effect control means specifies the number of pending storages stored by the first pending storage means and the second pending storage means based on the pending storage information. And hold display control for displaying the hold display of the number of the specified holding memories in a predetermined display mode (for example, the first normal display (red circular display), the second normal display (blue circular display)) Means (for example, a portion for executing steps S6021 and S6022 in the effect control microcomputer 100), wherein the pending display control means can not normally receive the pending storage information or the determination result information, When it is recognized that the pending storage has increased in the first pending storage means or the second pending storage means, the pending display corresponding to the increased pending storage is displayed in a predetermined display mode. Different special display modes (e.g., missed aspect (green round Display)) for displaying (e.g., partial executes step S6032 in effect control microcomputer 100) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of pending storage even if the pending storage information or the determination result information can not be received normally, and the player is distrusted Can be prevented.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern classification determination table for loss. It is an explanatory view showing a hit change pattern judging table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss change pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of a symbol specification command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a reservation specific field and a reservation buffer. It is a flow chart which shows production processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows pre-reading advance notice production determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows pre-reading advance notice production determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows pre-reading advance notice production determination processing. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a pre-reading advance notice distribution table. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop design of a production design. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the presentation aspect of pre-reading advance presentation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the presentation aspect of pre-reading advance presentation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the presentation aspect of pre-reading advance presentation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the presentation aspect of pre-reading advance presentation production. It is an explanatory view showing execution timing of pre-reading advance notice production. It is an explanatory view showing execution timing of pre-reading advance notice production. It is an explanatory view for explaining pre-reading notice setting restriction period. It is an explanatory view for explaining pre-reading notice setting restriction period. It is an explanatory view showing a plurality of effects system about change of holding ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect (color change: big hit expectation degree) of holding ball change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the presentation aspect (shape change: super reach expectation degree) of holding ball change. It is explanatory drawing which shows distribution of the change aspect of a holding ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows presentation distribution at the time of color determination of a holding ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows presentation distribution at the time of shape determination of a holding ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the table for holding ball display processes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the table for holding ball display processes. It is an explanatory view showing execution timing of pre-reading advance notice production.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. Note that "variable display" is also referred to as "variable display". In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas in which, for example, three effect symbols for decoration (for effect), "left", "middle", and "right", are variably displayed. There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When variation display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variation display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, the fluctuation indication including reach production is called reach fluctuation indication. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the variation display of the effect design is performed as the effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story property may be executed, and an effect such as displaying the result of the story based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern may be performed. For example, a battle wrestling, a soccer game, and a battle game in which an enemy ally character fights are performed, and if it is a big hit, a effect to win the game or battle is performed, and if it is a loss, a effect to lose the game or battle is performed. It is also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be performed such that a predetermined story such as a story is sequentially developed.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (but, correctly, the variation display of the presentation symbol changes on the microcomputer 100 side for presentation control) It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the rendering using the rendering display 9, for example, the content of the rendering including the fluctuation display of the rendering pattern disappears from the screen for a moment Effects are being diversified, such as effects being performed, and effects such as moving objects blocking all or part of the screen being performed. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the state is currently in the state of fluctuating display. So, in this embodiment, by performing the variation display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, is the state of the present variation display now by confirming the state of the fourth symbol? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. In addition, since the 4th design is always changed and displayed in a fixed operation, and it does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be generically referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  The variation (variation display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. The synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, the display color that reminds of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the off. For example, the off) Sometimes it is displayed in blue while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit Note that the type of big hit (if it is different depending on whether it is 15R positive variation big hit, 10R positive variation big hit, 2R positive variation big hit) When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the 2nd special symbol display 8b, the display color which evokes a big hit in the 4th symbol display area 9d for the 2nd special symbol (A display color different from an outlier. For example, it is displayed in blue when outliers, but in red when it is a big hit. Note that the type of big hit ( The display color may differ depending on whether it is a 5R probability variation big hit, a 10R probability variation big hit, or a 2R probability variation big hit.) The fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off. It is desirable that the display color of time be a display color (for example, black) different from that of the background image in order to prevent the display image from becoming disintegrated with the background image when the light is turned off.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area is provided in part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, but separately from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variation display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be displayed whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided respectively corresponding to the separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d is shown, the first special symbol and the second special are illustrated. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, the fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized using a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as repeating display and display of different display colors at predetermined time intervals. Also, for example, when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, for example The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as turning on and off repeatedly at different time intervals. Also, for example, the same big hit symbol is used for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, stop symbols of different modes may be stopped and displayed.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of fluctuating display of the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). On the right side of the lower part of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of fluctuating display of the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variation indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The first special condition or the second special condition of the variable display indicates that the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display is established (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After passing 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the fact that a jackpot game is not executed) is established, and when the fluctuation display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange nails closely around 13 and to make it difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13, so that the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 14 You may make it be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided to perform the opening and closing operation only for the second starting winning opening 14, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 13 The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations is provided for any of the start winning openings 14.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of activated winning balls entering the first starting winning opening 13, ie, the first number of pending storages (pending storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning storage) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators to display the number of activated winning balls entered the second start winning opening 14, ie the second reserve memory number Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In addition, in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is provided a combined hold storage display unit 18c that displays the total number (total hold storage number) which is the sum of the first reserve storage number and the second reserve storage number. ing. In this embodiment, by providing the combined hold storage display unit 18c that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. . In this embodiment, the first hold storage and the second hold storage are arranged and displayed in the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 in the total hold storage display unit 18c. Displayed in a manner capable of recognizing whether it is the first holding memory or the second holding memory (for example, the first holding memory is displayed with a white holding ball, and the second holding memory is displayed with a gray holding ball Will be

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect pattern as the symbol of. The variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. In addition, the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8 b and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  In this embodiment, as described later, microcomputer 560 for game control which controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol transmits the fluctuation pattern command which can specify fluctuation time, and is received by microcomputer 100 for effect control. According to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the rendering symbol is controlled. Therefore, since the fluctuation time is specified based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation display of the rendering symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the event that a change in data of the fluctuation pattern command or the like occurs, the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 side and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. Therefore, when an unexpected situation such as data corruption of a command occurs, a situation may occur in which the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the rendering symbol are not completely synchronized.

  Also, since the effect control microcomputer 100 can specify the change time based on the received change pattern command, does the time required for the holding ball change effect (referred to as “hold ball change effect time”) be less than the change time? It is also possible to determine whether or not the holding ball change presentation time is less than the fluctuation time, and perform control to execute the holding ball change presentation. In the present embodiment, when the holding ball change presentation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command is equal to or longer than the fluctuation time, the holding ball change presentation is carried over to the next fluctuation.

  In the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, on the left side, a movable member 78 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moving when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when an effect of pseudo ream or a notice effect (movable object advance effect) is performed. Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as a effect blade role) which is attached to the rotary shaft of the motor 87 below the left and right and moves when the motor 87 rotates. 79a, 79b are provided. In this embodiment, the effect blade members 79a and 79b operate when a notice effect (a effect blade effect notice effect) is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning openings (ordinary winning openings) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of prize gaming balls determined in advance based on the winning of the gaming balls. The game balls that have won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “o” and “x”) called a normal symbol.

  When the game ball passes the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbol is visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp is lit at the end of the variable display, it becomes a hit. . Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, the high probability state where the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is a high state (a state where the probability of being determined as a big hit as a variation display result of the special symbol is increased as compared to the normal state) However, in the high probability / low base state which will be described later), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 will hit is increased and the opening time and the number of times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. .

  At the left and right periphery of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided an decoration LED 25 which blinks during the game, and at the lower part there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. Further, on the upper left and right of the game area 7, two speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means operable by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that allows the player to perform a pressing operation. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that allows the player to perform a pressing operation, but also with a dial that allows the player to perform a rotation operation. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of an effect) by rotating the dial.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. If the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, it is possible to start the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the fluctuation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the number of first pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, it is possible to start variable display of the second special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 2) is satisfied, and the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit is reached, the game is shifted to a so-called positive change state after the big hit game is over, and the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is more likely to be start-up winning (ie, special symbol display It shifts to a high base state which is a gaming state controlled to be easy to hold the execution condition of the fluctuation display in the devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started. It should be noted that in this embodiment, if a big hit is made, it is always shifted to a definite change state, but if a big hit is made, a game may be made so that it may be transferred to a so-called time saving state other than the definite change state. You may configure the machine. In this case, the high base state may be shifted even in the short time state.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by transfering to the normal symbol time short state in which the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a time reduction state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, so the variation of the special symbol and the representation symbol starts It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence (in other words, the quickening of the reserve memory) and the occurrence of an invalid start winning. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created in the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the game state (i.e., the special symbol process flag etc.) according to the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 503 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560) The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  In addition, an input driver circuit 58 for providing detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31 There is. In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which fluctuates and displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which fluctuates and displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of the big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 is performed to variably display the effect pattern.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side through the lamp driver board 35. Control the sound output from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 through the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 87 for operating the effect blade role members 79 a and 79 b through the output port 106.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player via the input port 107.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving an LED or a lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving an LED or a lamp is input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED or the lamp. In addition, current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect pattern).

  Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 updates the numerical data of the counter according to the set update rule, within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 1) and the upper limit value (for example, 100) are set, At start-up winning that occurs at random timing (specifically, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives a command at start-up winning from the game control microcomputer 560) is reading (extraction) of numerical data. On the basis of the above, it has a random number generation function in which numerical data to be read out is a random number value. In the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 has a plurality of random number generation functions composed of a plurality of counters, and in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is in a predetermined period (game control microcomputer 560 (When the command at the time of starting winning is received), the value is extracted from the predetermined counter, the extraction value is made random X value, the value is extracted from the predetermined counter, the extraction value is made random Y value Do. In the present embodiment, the random X is the color (no change, blue or red) of the holding ball or the shape (not broken, not broken, in the case of performing the pre-reading advance notice effect of the effect mode of the "holding ball change" Random Y is used to determine which effect number (if any effect number is to be performed) in the case of performing pre-read advance notice effects of the effect mode of “hold ball change”. Shall be used when

  In addition, the microcomputer 100 for effect control has an effect mode (predictive notice effect effect (whether the change of the change pattern at symbol change, the mode transition, the countdown, or the holding ball change)). A random number for pre-reading advance notice effect mode determination for deciding, and a production for determining an effect system (whether "color change" or "shape change") in the case of performing pre-read advance notice effect of "hold ball change" It also has a function to generate system determination random numbers. The effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter at a predetermined time (when a command for start winning is received from the game control microcomputer 560), and extracts the value of the extracted preview advance notice effect mode determination random number The preview advance presentation effect mode is determined by. Further, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter at a predetermined time (when the command for starting winning is received from the gaming control microcomputer 560), and the value of the extracted effect system determination random number Determine the production system by

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output Port buffer), a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 displays a display result specifying command specifying a display result (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit or departure) stored in the backup RAM to the production control board 80 And transmit (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, if the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, for example, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command (see FIG. 13). You may do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation specification command or the second symbol variation specification command.

  In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the fluctuation time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been saved is restarted, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is resumed, When the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of a special symbol process flag described later. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process processing is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  It should be noted that the CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the fluctuation time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not, instead of transmitting the display result specification command at the time of power failure recovery. . Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, it is fluctuating at power failure. It may be determined not to be in the state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  The CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is three. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates at power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command is not transmitted, judging that it is not inside.

  In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determining a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  In the present embodiment, the reach effect is performed using the effect pattern variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is made a big hit symbol, reach production is always executed (However, in the case of sudden positive change big hit, sudden change positive hit large hit symbol (for example "135") without becoming reach) May appear stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not made a big hit symbol, the microcomputer 560 for game control decides whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery for determining a variation pattern type and a variation pattern using random numbers. Do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the control of the reach effect.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states of them are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro-circuit mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to on / off of solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variation display mode of the effect design is referred to as a "non-reach" (usually referred to as a "normally off") variation display mode when the result of the variable display is a lost pattern.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a fluctuation display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a fluctuation display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach failure") when the fluctuation display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variation display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the "left", "middle" and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped (in the case of sudden definite variation big hit) There is also a case where a sudden change big hit symbol (for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed without reaching.

  When the small special hit "5" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variation display mode of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 is "suddenly, there is a certain variation big hit" In the same manner as in the above case, after the variable display of the rendering symbol is performed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden positive variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is called the "small hit" variation display mode .

  Here, the small hit is an allowed hit up to the number of times the number of opening of the large winning opening is smaller than the number of the large winning opening (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 seconds). When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the positive change state to the normal state or from the normal state to the positive change state. In addition, the sudden change big hit is allowed the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening time of 0.1 seconds twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely It is a short jackpot, and it is a jackpot to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to a definite change state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it were suddenly changed to a definite change state Is). That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is the same between the sudden change big hit and the small hit suddenly. By controlling in this way, when the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit suddenly. (Perspective change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit type is configured to be all positive variation big hit (in this embodiment, 15R positive variation big hit, 10R positive variation big hit, 2R positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit), the small hit It is not necessary to provide it. Also, in the case where a small hit is provided when all the big hit types are definite variation big hits, it is preferable to provide a sudden change variation big hit that is only transferred to the high probability state and not accompanied by the high base state. . However, in this embodiment, as described later, the ratio of becoming a super reach when the high probability / low base state is made at the time of the 71st variable display after the end of the big hit game is increased, but If the game is configured to have a sudden probability variation big hit that becomes a high probability / low base state, high probability in all variation displays until the variation display of the 71st rotation is finished after the big hit game by sudden probability variation big hit is finished Since the state is controlled to the low base state, the ratio of becoming the super reach in all the variable display until the definite change state is ended is increased. Therefore, when configured to provide a sudden probability variation big hit that becomes a high probability / low base state, it becomes a super reach instead of always increasing the rate of becoming a super reach in the high probability / low base state. It is possible to set the time to increase the ratio and the time not to increase (as usual). Also, for example, instead of seeing the gaming state (for example, whether the high probability flag or the high base flag is set or not), the number of fluctuation display after the big hit game is counted, and the 71st fluctuation display Only when there is a need to increase the rate of super reach. If configured in such a manner, when providing a sudden probability variation big hit that becomes a high probability / low base state, after reaching a sudden hit of the big hit game by the probability variation big hit, the super reach in It is possible to prevent the appearance rate from continuously increasing.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA 1-1-1-1 as non-reach PA-1 as a change pattern corresponding to the case where the change display result is “off” and the change display mode of the rendering symbol is “non-reach” The fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. In addition, as a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "off" and the fluctuation display mode of the effect symbol is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 The variation patterns of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-2 and Super PB 3-1 to Super PB 3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when non-reaching and is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream. In the case of using the normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and which are accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-fluctuation is to execute the fluctuation display of the production design again after temporarily stopping the production design that is temporarily distracted from the start of the fluctuation display of the production design until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol -3-Normal PB2-4, super PA3-3-super PA3-4, super PB3-3-super PB3-4, special PG1-1-special PG1-3, special PG2-1-special PG 2-2 variation pattern Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-3 and the variation pattern of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo-representation, which is used when the sudden variation is not a big hit or a small hit, when using the normal PB2-3, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, a re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 which is used in the case of the sudden big hit or small hit and which is accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo link, the fluctuation time is 32). Fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo run, the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example The fluctuation time may be varied according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3, 4 It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern type determination table for use), select the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number, and make the variation time different.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit mentioned later, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for big hit classification judgment)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and determines the variation using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) It is determined to be one of the variation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the features of the variation modes. For example, a plurality of change patterns are grouped by reach type, and a change pattern type including a change pattern with normal reach, a change pattern type including a change pattern with super reach A, and a change pattern with super reach B It may be divided into the variation pattern type. Also, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations in the pseudo sequence, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern not accompanied by a pseudo sequence, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, and It may be divided into a variation pattern type including two variation patterns and a variation pattern type including three variation patterns. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped by the presence or absence of specific effects such as pseudo-runs and slip effects.

  In this embodiment, as described later, when it is 15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, normal CA 3-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, And it is classified into normal CA3-2 which is a fluctuation pattern classification including a fluctuation pattern with a pseudo ream, and super CA3-3 which is a fluctuation pattern classification with a super reach. Also, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA 4-1 which is a variation pattern type including non-reach variation pattern and special CA 4-2 which is a variation pattern type including variation pattern with reach. ing. Moreover, when it is a small hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including the fluctuation pattern of non-reach. Moreover, when it is a loss, it is a change pattern type including a change pattern type including a change pattern including neither a reach nor a specific effect, and a change pattern including a specific effect but not including a reach. Non-reach CA2-2 and non-reach CA2-3, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortening variation with neither reach nor specific rendering, and normal CA2-4, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving only normal reach And normal CA2-5, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and re-variation twice, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and one re-rotation. -6 and super CA 2-7, which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number of (1) and the random number per normal symbol determination of (4) Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal time big hit determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state) and a positive change time big hit determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8A in the positive change time jackpot determination table Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability change state is shifted to the high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be the big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and also the high base state is transferred to the high probability state. There are two cases: transition to the probability state only and not transition to the high base state (low base state), but in any case, positive change state For the probability variation big hit decision table is used, otherwise the normal time big hit decision table is used. As described later, in this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is shifted to the high probability state and the high base state after the big hit game is over. Then, after the end of the big hit, the positive change state continues until the variable display is finished 71 times. However, after the big hit, the high base state is ended when the variable display is finished 70 times and is shifted to the low base state, and only the high probability state is continued until 71 times of variable display. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the big hit is finished, only the high probability state is transitioned to the high base state from the end of the 70th variable display until the end of the 71st variable display. There may be a probability change state (no base state).

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 8C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hitting determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C may not be provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state. Even if the small hit occurs even when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state, and if it is configured to perform an effect asking whether or not to be the positive change, although the current playing state is the positive changing state Rather, it makes the player feel bothersome. Therefore, if small hits are not generated during the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits are less likely to be generated when the gaming state is a definite change state, and a turning effect for a definite change is not performed more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit judgment value, it decides to make it a big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) concerning special symbols. If the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hit at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 8E shows the case where the jackpot type is determined by using the retention memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type judgment table 131a, 131b is the jackpot type “15R probability variation jackpot” based on the random number for the jackpot type judgment (random 1) when it is judged that the variable display result is made a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), eight judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes Whereas in the big hit classification determination table 131b, 2 judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" (a ratio of 2/40). The case where it is determined to be a definite big hit suddenly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 131a, and "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 131b (that is, , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), a sudden probability big hit as a first specific gaming state for giving a predetermined amount of gaming value and an amount larger than the gaming value If you decide on 15 rounds of probability variation big hit "15R probability variation big hit", 10 rounds probability variation big hit "10R probability variation big hit" and 2 rounds probability variation big hit "2R probability variation big hit" as the second specific gaming state to give gaming value Although there is a case where it is determined that the first specific gaming state is to be made at a high rate when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the game value to be provided is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to the number of rounds. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, as the gaming value to determine the second specific gaming state to increase the allowable number of winning number (count number) of gaming balls to the large winning opening per round It is also good. In addition, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state may be determined in which the opening time of the big winning opening per jackpot as a gaming value is increased as the gaming value. Also, for example, even if it is a big hit of the same 15 rounds, a first specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened once per round, and a second specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times per round The game value of the second specific gaming state may be enhanced by preparing and opening the number of times of opening of the special winning opening substantially. In this case, for example, in either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 15 rounds) In the case of the second specific gaming state, an undigested round is left), and an effect may be executed in such a manner as to ask whether or not the big hit continues further. Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the big hit game is ended since all 15 rounds are internally ended, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, internally undivided rounds remain Therefore, the big hit game may be continued (the effect that opening of the big winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after ending the big hit of 15 times open) may be performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), there are "15R positive variation big hit", "10R positive variation big hit", "2R positive variation big hit" and "sudden definite positive hit" as the big hit types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is three types of 15 rounds, 10 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is It is not limited to the one shown in the form. For example, a 7R probability variation big hit that controls 7 rounds of big hit games or a 5R probability variation big hit that controls 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, the case where the big hit type is four types “15R positive variation big hit”, “10R positive variation big hit”, “2R positive variation big hit” and “suddenly positive variation big hit” is shown. Alternatively, for example, five or more types of jackpot types may be provided. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than four types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  "15R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that controls 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a definite change state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to high probability state and high base The state is also transferred, see steps S166 to S169 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the high base state is ended when the variable display is ended 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state is ended when the variable display is ended 71 times (see the steps S167 and S140) .

  "10R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that controls to 10 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to the positive changing state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to high probability state and high base The state is also transferred, see steps S166 to S169 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the high base state is ended when the variable display is ended 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state is ended when the variable display is ended 71 times (see the steps S167 and S140) .

  "2R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that controls to 2 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a positive changing state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to high probability state and high base The state is also transferred, see steps S166 to S169 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the high base state is ended when the variable display is ended 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state is ended when the variable display is ended 71 times (see the steps S167 and S140) .

  In addition, "2R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that the opening number of big winning opening is allowed only 2 times (2 rounds) like "sudden probability variation big hit" mentioned later, but unlike "suddenly probability variation big hit" The opening time of the winning opening per round is long (29 seconds in this embodiment). Therefore, in the case of "suddenly odd variation big hit" to be described later, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game, but if it becomes "2R true variation big hit", the big prize Although the number of times of opening the mouth is small, it can be expected that the gaming ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game.

  In addition, "Suddenly positive variation big hit" is the number of times the number of opening of the big winning opening is small compared with "15R true variation big hit" or "10R positive variation big hit" (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 seconds twice) It is a jackpot that is acceptable. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. In addition, in "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit", while the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, 1 round in "sudden probability variation big hit" The opening time of the big winning opening per turn is as short as 0.1 second, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, it is transitioned to a definite change state after the termination of that sudden change big hit game state suddenly (In this embodiment, it is transferred to a high probability state and also to a high base state. Steps to be described later See S166 to S169). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the high base state is ended when the variable display is ended 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state is ended when the variable display is ended 71 times (see the steps S167 and S140) .

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of a "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit gaming state by "a sudden definite big hit" Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game. As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit type is configured to be all positive variation big hit (in this embodiment, 15R positive variation big hit, 10R positive variation big hit, 2R positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit), the small hit It is not necessary to provide it. Also, as in this embodiment, in the case where a small hit is provided in the case where all the big hit types are all probability change big hits, the sudden probability change big hit that is only transferred to the high probability state and does not accompany the high base state It is preferable to set it (the opening pattern of the big winning opening is also made the same in the case of sudden big hit and small hit suddenly). However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of becoming a super reach is increased when executing the 71st variable display after the big hit game is over, but it is not accompanied by a small hit and a high base state suddenly When configured to have a probability variation big hit, the ratio of becoming a super reach in the 71st variable display is not always increased each time, and when the ratio of becoming a super reach is increased or not (as usual ratio) And may be configured to select the variation pattern in the same selection ratio / selection method as in the low probability / low base state in the high probability state after the sudden probability big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate of the super reach is permanently increased in the 71st variable display after the big hit end.

  The big hit classification judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1 and correspond to "15R positive variation big hit", "10R positive variation big hit", "2R positive variation big hit", and "suddenly positive variation big hit" The determined judgment value (big hit classification judgment value) is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variation display result is made a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type according to the jackpot type determination result, random number for fluctuation pattern type determination It is a table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination, which is normal CA 3-1 to normal CA 3-2, Determination values corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of the super CA 3-3, the special CA 4-1, and the special CA 4-2 are set.

  For example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" and the jackpot type is "15R probability variation jackpot" In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 9B used for the above, assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different.

  As described above, when the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the jackpot type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type. In addition, determination values are assigned to different fluctuation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Therefore, different fluctuation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be made, and the ratio determined to be the same fluctuation pattern type can be made different.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in this embodiment, in the case of “15R positive variation big hit”, “10R positive variation big hit” or “2R positive variation big hit”, for variation pattern type determination If the value of the random number (random 2) is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed.

  In addition, for super reach big hit, fluctuation pattern type with pseudo ream (fluctuation pattern type including fluctuation patterns of super PA3-3, super PA3-4) and fluctuation pattern type without pseudo ream (super PB3-3, super And the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both of the 10R / 2R probability variation big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the 15R probability variation big hit large hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo ream, and super reach And, a variation pattern type not accompanied by a pseudo run will be assigned.

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is "sudden probability variation big hit", for example, when the jackpot type such as special CA4-1, special CA4-2 is other than "sudden probability variation big hit" The judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type to which the judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the fluctuation display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is suddenly controlled to the big hit state according to the big hit type becoming "suddenly big hit big hit", 15R positive change big hit or 10R positive change big hit, 2R positive change into big hit state by big hit A variation pattern type different from that in control can be determined.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory view showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, when it is determined that the variation display result is made a small hit symbol, a plurality of variation pattern types, based on the random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), in the case where it is determined to be a small hit, it is shown that special CA 4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10D are explanatory diagrams showing the release variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 10A shows a variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. Further, FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern type determination table for deviation 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern for disconnection which is used when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (a state after the big hit end until the 70th variable display is finished) of the probability change states. The type determination table 135C is shown. Further, FIG. 10D shows the high probability / low base state of the gaming state among the probability change states (the state from the end of the 70th variable display after the end of the big hit to the end of the 71st variable display) Shows a variation pattern type determination table for deviation 135D used in the case of When it is determined that the fluctuation display result is to be a disappointing pattern, the fluctuation pattern classification determination tables 135A to 135D for a plurality of types are based on random number (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (C) and 10 (D), in this embodiment, even in the case of the positive variation, if the last 71st variation display is performed after the big hit, it is before that Compared to the case where the 70th variable display of is performed, the ratio in which the change pattern with super reach is selected is high. By doing so, in this embodiment, the expectation for the jackpot of the player at the end of the probability change state is displayed by performing the variation display of the super reach with high probability at the last change display at the end of the probability change state. I am enhancing my feeling. In addition to the last 71st variable display, for example, the ratio of becoming a super reach over the final variable display from the variable display before the predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times before) when the probability change state ends, etc. The super reach variation display may be performed with high probability over a plurality of variable displays.

  In this embodiment, after the big hit, the high probability state continues until the 71st variable display ends, and the high base state continues until the 70th variable display ends. Thus, although the final 71st variable display in the probability change state indicates that the high probability / low base state is controlled, the high base state is continued until the 71st variable display ends. It is also possible to control to the high probability / high base state also in the final 71st fluctuation display of the probability change state. However, when controlled in this manner, in this embodiment, as described later, the variable pattern type determination tables for disconnection 135C and 135D are selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag in the fluctuation pattern setting process. (See steps S95, S96, S100, and S101), but since the high probability / high base state remains even in the last 71st variable display of a definite change state, check the state of the flag in this way and use The variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D can not be selected. Therefore, when controlling to the high probability / high base state even in the final 71st fluctuation display of the probability change state, check the values of the high probability number counter and the high base number counter to be described later, and check the value of the counter. If the number of remaining times is one, the variation pattern type determination table 135D for disconnection is selected, and if the value of the counter is still 2 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for removal is selected. Good.

  Also, in the case where the ratio of becoming the super reach is increased from the variable display before the predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times before) the final change state ends, for example, the high probability number described later at the end of the big hit Set 75 times to the counter or high base frequency counter (for example, set 75 to both high probability frequency counter and high base frequency counter, high probability / high base state until 75 fluctuation display ends) The high probability frequency counter is set to 75, the high base frequency counter is set to 70, and the probability change state ends. It is also possible to control to the base state, and to control the state to the high probability / low base state from before 5 changes when the positive change state ends to the final change display. In the second embodiment, it is possible to select the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D by confirming the high probability flag and the high base flag according to the same control as that described in this embodiment (step S95, S96, S100, and S101)), at the start of the fluctuation display, whether the value of the high probability frequency counter or the high base frequency counter remains within a predetermined number (for example, 5) (the number of remaining positive changes) Check whether or not it is within the predetermined number of times, and if it is within the predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table 135D for outlier shown in FIG. Is selected, and if the value of the counter is still greater than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table for loss shown in FIG. It may be selected to 135C. In addition, the control method in the case of increasing the ratio of becoming a super reach from the variable display before the predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times before) when the definite change state ends is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, 71 is set to the high probability number counter as in this embodiment, and 66 is set to the high base number counter, to the contrary, and from 5 variations before the final variation state ends to the last variation display Is controlled to the high probability / low base state, and it is determined whether or not the value of the high probability frequency counter is 5 or less to select the out-of-transition variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D. May be Further, instead of judging the number of fluctuations after a big hit based on the count value of the high probability frequency counter or the high base frequency counter, it may be determined using another counter. For example, a counter is provided to count the number of changes after the end of the big hit game, and it is confirmed by checking whether the count value of the counter is within a predetermined range (for example, 71 to 75 or 66 to 71). It may be determined whether or not it is between 5 variations before the end of the condition and the last variable display, and the variation pattern type determination tables for losing 135 C and 135 D may be selected (note that the definite variation condition ends) The same may be applied to the case where the selection ratio of the super reach is increased only once in the last variable display, for example, the value of the counter for counting the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is, for example, 71. If it does not, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D may be selected. In addition, this control is performed in a case where control from the variable display before a predetermined number of times (for example, five times before) when the definite change state ends is controlled to the high probability / low base state until the end of the variable display of the final time. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type determination table for disconnection 135C or 135D may be selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag as in the above embodiment (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). ).

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the case is used where different variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135D for deviation are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is three or more. However, it may be configured to use the common variation pattern type determination table for loss in the case of the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, although the example shown in FIG. 10C shows the case where the common high base loss change pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storages, the high base loss change pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for loss (depending on the ratio of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the outset variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total number of pending storages is less than 3 and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more Although the case where two types of tables, such as the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table 135B used for, are used is shown, the way of dividing the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, separate outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables may be provided for each value of the total number of pending storages (that is, for 0 total pending storage numbers, 1 total pending storage number, 2 total pending storage numbers) The outset fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used separately for the total number of pending storages of three, the total number of pending storages for four, and so on). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, and the total pending storage number 4.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of pending storages, but according to the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number, the outlier variation pattern type determination A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when performing variable display of the first special symbol, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table separately prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number) Out of change variation pattern type judgment table for 0, 1 first pending storage number, 2 for 1st pending storage number, 3 for 1st pending storage number, 4 for 1st pending storage number, ... Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first number of pending storages may be used. For example, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used for the first pending storage number 0 to 2, for the first pending storage number 3, for the first pending storage number 4. Even in this case, when the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages are large (for example, 3 or more), the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variation time may be easily selected. . In addition, even in such a case, a common determination value may be allocated to a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach as a specific fluctuation display pattern.

  Note that the “specific effect mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern in which at least the expectation for a big hit is set high, such as a variation pattern with super reach, and the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, “expected degree for big hit (reliability)” indicates the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when the variable display (for example, the variable display with the super reach) according to the specific effect mode is executed ing. For example, the jackpot expectation when the variable indication with the super reach is performed is determined as (the ratio at which the super reach is performed when it is determined to be a big hit) / (when it is determined to be a big hit and as a loss) The rate at which the super reach is performed in both cases is calculated by calculating

  In each of the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B, numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the values of the random numbers (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type judgment, which are non reach CA2-1 to non reach CA2-1. A judgment value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of 3, normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, and super CA 2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B), in this embodiment, if the game state is normal and the game state is off, the value of the random number (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type determination Is 230-251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed regardless of the total number of pending storages.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, if the game state is normal and the game state is off, the value of the random number (random 2) for determination of the variation pattern type If 1 is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least not with the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo ream or the slip effect) regardless of the total number of pending storages. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A, 135B) is at least one of variation display patterns other than the reach variation display pattern (variation pattern with reach). For some, regardless of the number of rights stored by the pending storage means (the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer) (the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, the total pending storage number) Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are configured to be assigned. As described in this embodiment, “a variation display pattern other than the variation display pattern for reach” does not involve reach, for example, and does not involve any specific effects such as pseudo reams or slip effects, and results of variation display Is a variation display pattern (variation pattern) used when a big hit is not made.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, although the case of using the common jackpot variation pattern type determination table regardless of the current gaming state is shown, whether the current gaming state is a definite change state The jackpot variation pattern type determination table separately prepared may be used depending on whether it is in the normal state. Further, in this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the shortening fluctuation pattern is determined by selecting the shortening out-of-order fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 10 (B). Although a case is shown where there is a case, the total number of pending storages (the number of first pending storages or the number of second pending storages may be used when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state The threshold of) may be made different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the total number of pending storages is three (or, for example, when the number of first pending storages and the number of second pending storages is two), for shortening If there is a case where the variation pattern of shortening variation may be determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for losing, and the gaming state is the high base state, the total number of pending storages is 1 or 2 smaller But (or, for example, even in the case of 0 or 1 where the number of first reserved memories and second reserved memory is smaller), the shortening fluctuation pattern type judgment table is selected and the fluctuation pattern of shortening fluctuation is determined It may be possible to

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. When it is determined that the fluctuation display result is "big hit" or "small hit", the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type, etc. It is a table referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3) for use. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is to be any of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3, hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table, and the variation pattern type is special. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that one of CA4-1 and the special CA4-2. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variation display result of the rendering symbol is It includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the "big hit".

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern type includes normal CA 3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and a pseudo link. The case where it is classified into a certain normal CA3-2 and a super CA3-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a super reach (sometimes with a pseudo reach with a super reach) is shown. Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA 4-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA 4- that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with a reach. The case of being classified into 2 is shown. In addition, in FIG. 11 (B), you may divide a fluctuation pattern classification by the presence or absence of specific effects, such as a pseudo | simulation series and a slip production, instead of dividing a fluctuation pattern classification by the presence or absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes the special PG 1-1 and the special PG 2-1, which are variation patterns without a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 is a special PG 1-2 with a specific effect, a special It may be configured to include PG1-3 and special PG2-2.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view showing the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A determines the variation display result to be “off” based on the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to decide fluctuation pattern in either of multiple types. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, command 80 XX (H) is a production control command (fluctuation pattern command for specifying the fluctuation pattern of the production symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). In addition, you may make it include the information which shows whether the fluctuation | variation display of a 1st special symbol is started or the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol is started in a fluctuation | variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Upon receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variation display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A 001 and A 002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, depending on the type of big hit, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command is used. Specifically, in the case of "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit", and "2R probability variation big hit", the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used, "suddenly positive variation big hit" or "small small hit" In the case of "hit", the small hit / sudden definite big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits a fanfare designation command for a definite big hit start designation when it is a big hit suddenly, it does not send a fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set to the EXT data and transmitted for the special winning opening open designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted after the special winning opening open command, a different special winning opening after opening specification command is transmitted every round. For example, when the first round in the big hit game is ended, the designated special command (A 201 (H)) is sent after the opening of the big winning opening which designates the round 1, and the tenth round in the big hit game is ended. Is sent after the special winning opening opening specifying the round 10, a specification command (A30A (H)).

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end designated command (A301 (H)) is used when ending the big hit game by “15R positive variation big hit”, “10R positive variation big hit”, “2R true variation big hit”. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 2 specified command) for specifying the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the ending designation command for the sudden change big hit termination specification suddenly in the case of the sudden change big hit, but not to send the ending specification command in the case of the small hit. It is also good.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the high probability / low base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that there has been a first start prize. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start prize designation command) for designating that there has been a second start prize. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first starting winning a prize designation command and the second starting winning a prize designation command may be generically referred to as a starting winning a prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for specifying a total number (total pending storage number) which is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total number of pending storages. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (sum total storage number subtraction designation command) for designating 1 subtraction of the total number of suspension storage numbers. In this embodiment, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a sum holding memory number subtraction designation command when subtracting the sum holding memory number, but does not use the sum holding memory number subtraction designation command, When subtracting the total pending storage number, a combined total pending storage number specification command may be sent which specifies the total total pending storage number after subtraction.

  In this embodiment, as the command for designating the number of pending storages, the total pending storage number specifying command for designating the total pending storage number is transmitted. However, the first pending storage and the second pending storage May be configured to send a command specifying the number of pending storages that has increased. Specifically, when the first pending storage increases, a first pending storage number specifying command for designating the first pending storage number is transmitted, and when the second pending storage increases, the second pending storage number is specified. The second pending storage number specification command may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, a start winning designation command specifying which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has been started is transmitted as holding storage information, and the total number of pending holdings is stored. Although the case where the total reservation memory number designation | designated command which designates 、 is transmitted is shown, the presentation control command transmitted as reservation memory information is not restricted to what was shown by this embodiment. For example, when the number of pending storages increases, the pending storage number addition designation command (the first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending storage number addition indicates that the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number has increased) The command for subtracting the number of pending storages, which indicates that the number of pending storages or the number of second pending storages has decreased when the number of pending storages decreases while sending the specified command The second pending storage number subtraction designation command may be transmitted.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among them, the command C4XX (H) is the effect control command (design designation command) indicating whether or not it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit, or the type of the big hit among the judgment results when winning. is there. In addition, command C6XX (H) is the effect control command indicating the determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the random value for the variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. (Variable category command).

  In this embodiment, in the prize-time effect processing (see FIG. 21) to be described later (see FIG. 21), the microcomputer 560 for game control is a big hit or not, or a small hit or not It is determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of which determination value. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a type of a big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value designating the range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and Based on the fluctuation category command, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined judgment value, the fluctuation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, the EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined in the winning-time effect processing described later that the “off” is to occur, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that "15R probability variation big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which "01 (H)" is set to the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that "10R probability variation big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which "02 (H)" is set to the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that "2R probability variation big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that "the sudden probability big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set to the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that "small hit" will be, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 6 designation command) in which "05 (H)" is set to the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read out when setting the symbol specifying command and when setting the display result specifying command.

  FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the variation category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is, and which display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol is displayed, the random pattern determination random number at the start winning combination A value is set to the EXT data according to whether it is determined that the value of R falls within the range of any determination value, and the variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is normal and off at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. It is determined whether or not. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1 is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the change pattern type becomes the non-reach CA2-1 based on the change category 1 command being received. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination value 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA 2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  The threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above change categories belongs to are specifically shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. The values are derived by picking up values that can be the boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the out-of-plane variation pattern type determination table. The same applies to the subsequent variation categories 9-12 and 21-29, and each variation in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D and FIGS. 10C and 10D. A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of determination values assigned to the pattern type.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / high base state and falling off at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the variation pattern type determination random number in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. It is determined whether it becomes 1 to 219 or not. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 2 19 (ie, if it becomes the variation pattern type of non-reach CA 2-3), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “08 (H)” Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send variation category 10 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / low base state and falling off at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the variation pattern type determination random number in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. It is determined whether 1 to 79 or not. If the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79 (that is, if it is the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1), the CPU 56 sets fluctuation as “0 A (H)” in the EXT data Send a category 11 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0 B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send variation category 12 command.

  Even when the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), even if the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is assigned to the range of the judgment value 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when performing the processing of step S232 of the processing of the effect at the time of winning, which will be described later, if it is a disconnection, the common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the determination processing of the gaming state in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that "10R probability variation big hit" or "2R probability variation big hit" at the start winning combination, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the variation pattern type determination random number in step S232 of the prize time rendering process described later. It is determined whether it becomes 1 to 74 or not. If the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, if it is the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets fluctuation data in which “10 (H)” is set to the EXT data. 21 Send a command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 22 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 3-3). Send variation category 23 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” will be obtained at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. It is determined whether or not. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “13 (H)” as the variation category Send 24 commands. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3) Send variation category 26 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the start winning combination suddenly becomes a definite positive big hit, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes 1 to 100 in step S232 of the winning presentation processing described later. Determine If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “16 (H)” as the variation category 27 Send a command. Next, if the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 101 to 251 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-2), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “17 (H)” as the variation category Send 28 commands.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will be made at the start winning combination, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set to the EXT data.

  It should be noted that since the total number of pending storages is not necessarily the same between when the winning determination is made at the start winning and when the variable display is actually started, the variation indicated by the winning determination result specification command It may also occur that the pattern type does not match the fluctuation pattern type actually used in the fluctuation display. However, in this embodiment, for at least non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 and super CA3-3 variation pattern types, common judgment values are allocated regardless of the total number of pending storages. There is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Therefore, in this embodiment, a pre-reading advance notice effect described later is executed on the fluctuation display determined at the time of winning when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 or super CA3-3. It is good. The variation category command shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, only when it is determined that the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 and super CA3-3 is determined The variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of the winning determination result of the other variation pattern types. In addition, when it is determined at the time of winning that it becomes other than non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 and super CA3-3, even if it transmits fluctuation category command which shows that fluctuation pattern classification can not be specified. Good.

  Note that “pre-reading advance notice effect” is an advance notice effect that is executed prior to the start of the variable display targeted for the notice effect. In this embodiment, the effect is started from the variable display started after the occurrence of the start winning for the variable display to be notified, and a plurality of times before the variable display to be the target of the advance effect is started. There are those which are continuously executed over the variable display (pre-reading advance notice effect of the aspect of “change of change form at symbol change”, “mode transition”, “countdown” described later). However, it is not necessary to execute the notice effect over a plurality of times of the variable display, for example, by performing the advance notice effect in only one time of the variable display before the start of the variable display targeted for the preliminary effect. It may be. Also, for example, the advance notice effect is started from the variable display before the start of the variable display to be the target of the advance effect production, and the notice effect is produced by the variable display immediately before the variable display to be the target of the preview effect. It may be finished, or it may be the one that performs the notice effect over the variable display to be the object of the notice effect. In addition, it is not necessary to continuously execute over a plurality of variable displays, and for example, the advance notice effect may be performed in a plurality of variable displays intermittently every other time or every second time. However, with regard to the pre-read advance notice effect in the form of “countdown” described later, since the effect becomes unnatural if the countdown is only once or intermittent, it may be continuously performed over a plurality of variable displays. desirable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect is started from the variable display started after the start winning for the variable display to be notified is generated, and the mode of the holding ball to be notified in advance within the period until the variable display is stopped. There may be a case in which a pre-reading preview effect of an aspect of "hold ball change" of changing (color or shape) is performed. In this case, the effect itself that changes the mode of "hold ball change" (a effect that a dwarf or a giant described later appears and performs a predetermined action on the hold ball) is within one variation display period. It will be executed. However, when the mode of the suspension display changes due to the effect and becomes the first special display or the second special display described later, the first special display or the second until the variable display based on the suspension display is started Special display will be continued. That is, the effect of changing the aspect of "hold ball change" is executed within one fluctuation period, but the advance notice of the aspect of "hold ball change" is continued over a plurality of change displays.

  In this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (for example, regardless of whether or not the high probability state or high base state, and whether or not in the big hit game), each time a start winning occurs When the winning determination process is executed, the symbol designating command shown in FIG. 15 is always transmitted and the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is transmitted. Then, based on the received symbol designating command and variation category command, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to reach a big hit or reach in advance before the variable display of the advance notice object is started. Execute advance notice to give notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  For example, microcomputer 560 for game control designates the fluctuation pattern of the production design every time when there is a starting winning and the variation display of the special symbol is started in 1st special symbol indicator 8a or 2nd special symbol indicator 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command consisting of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8 a in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the variation display (variation) of the presentation symbol and the second special It can be used in common with the variation display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 8b, and the image display which performs the rendering with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the rendering control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won in the first start winning opening 13 is on in the special symbol process processing, that is, the start to the first start winning opening 13 If there is a winning, or if the second starting opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening 14 is on, that is, the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 If it occurs, the starting opening switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. In addition, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time: time from the start of fluctuation display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) and the fluctuation time of fluctuation display of special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 29), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the micro-computer 100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the specified command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, processing is performed to set a flag (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) indicating the gaming state. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of step S312. In the starting opening switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state (step S1211). If the 1st starting opening switch 13a is not an ON state, it will transfer to step S1222. If the first starting port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first pending storage for counting the first number of pending storages Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1213) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the combined hold storage number counter in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the order of winning for the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1215).

  In this embodiment, when the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the first starting winning opening 13), data indicating "first" is set, When the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the second starting winning opening 14), data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first starting port switch 13 a is turned on in the storage-preferring specific information storage area (pending specific area). When the 2 start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating the "second". In this case, when there is no corresponding pending storage, 00 (H) is set in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area).

  FIG. 20A is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of the suspension storage specification information storage area (storage suspension area). As shown in FIG. 20A, in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured. Note that FIG. 20A shows an example in which the value of the combined pending storage number counter is five. As shown in FIG. 20A, in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first start winning opening 13 2) Based on the winning on the start winning opening 14, data indicating that it is "first" or "second" is set in the winning order. Therefore, the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 is stored in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area). The hold specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the storage area of the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20B) (see FIG. Step S1216). In the process of step S1216, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. The variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) is not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the first special symbol. May be For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 20B is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of an area (pending buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 20B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect rendering process in which the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern type when fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed is determined at the time of starting winning (step S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the prize effect process (step S 1218), and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S 1220), and sets the value of the total hold memory number counter to the EXT data to specify the total hold memory number specification command Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1221).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218 and S1219, the CPU 56 is used regardless of the gaming state (high probability state or high base state, big hit gaming state or not). Each time the first start winning opening 13 is started, the symbol selection command and the variation category command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize for the first start winning opening 13 is generated by executing the processing of steps S1218 to S1221, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the first starting prize designation A set of four commands, that is, the command and the total number of pending storage specification commands, is transmitted in batch in one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the second start port switch 14a is in the on state (step S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending storage for counting the second number of pending storages) Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1223). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1224) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the area corresponding to the value of the total suspension storage number counter in the suspension storage specific information storage area (preservation specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts the values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20B) Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. The variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) is not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the second special symbol. May be For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize effect process (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the prize effect process (step S1229), and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1230). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1231) and sets the value of the total hold memory number counter to the EXT data to specify the total hold memory number specification command Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1232).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 performs the process of steps S1229 and S1230 regardless of the gaming state (high probability state or high base state, big hit gaming state or not). Each time the second start winning opening 14 receives a start winning, it always transmits both the symbol designation command and the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is generated by executing the processing of steps S1229 to S1232, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the second start winning specified. A set of four commands, that is, the command and the total number of pending storage specification commands, is transmitted in batch in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the effect processing at the time of winning in steps S1217 and S1228. In the prize effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing, which will be described later, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, the big hit type or the variation pattern setting processing However, before the variation display based on the start winning is started at the timing when the game ball is started to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number fall within the range of any judgment value by executing the winning presentation process. By doing so, the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type are predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is executed, and the microcomputer for effect control is based on the judgment result at the time of winning as described later. By performing the preview notice production to predict that it will be a big hit or super reach during the variation display of the production design by 100.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 is in a high probability state (probability state. High probability / high base state and high probability / high probability / It is checked whether the high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability variation shown in the right column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays will be executed from when it is confirmed in step S221 whether or not it is a positive change condition at the start winning combination and the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state changes (for example, the change start) until the variable display based on the start change is actually started after it is confirmed in step S221 whether the start change is a definite change state or not. There is a case where it has changed from the normal state to the positive change state if there is a 15R positive change big hit, the 10R positive change big hit, the 2R positive change big hit, and the sudden positive change big hit. Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of definite variation (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 The small hit determination values shown in (C) and (C) are compared, and it is confirmed whether they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S 1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hitting determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8B). It is determined whether it matches with the small hit judgment value set in (for special symbol). In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when performing the winning processing at step S1228), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (C) It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that it becomes "off" as the symbol designation command Processing is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing to determine the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the high probability state and in the high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set in step S225). To determine if it is In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are established in step S225 at the start winning combination, the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be performed. Therefore, after checking whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are confirmed in step S225 at the start winning combination, the game state is performed from when the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. Is changed (for example, it changes from a normal state to a positive change state when a positive change is hit, a 2R positive change big hit, a 2R positive change big hit, or a 2R positive change big hit before the start of fluctuation). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for removal in accordance with the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination in advance is incorporated, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of any determination value by determining whether it is larger than the threshold value. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is the high probability / high base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 219 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 219 (ie, when it is 1 to 219) Determines that “08 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When it is not the threshold 219 or less (ie, when it is 220-251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  Also, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, it sets the threshold value 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 79 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 79 (ie, 1 to 79). Determines that “0A (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (ie, if it is 80 to 251), it is determined that “0 B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU sets thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 79 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 79 (ie, 1 to 79). Determines that “00 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 89 or less (ie, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 99 or less (ie, 90 to 99), it is determined that "02 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). Further, when the threshold value is 169 or less (ie, when it is 100 to 169), it is determined that "03 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is equal to or less than the threshold 214 (ie, if it is 200 to 214), it is determined that "05 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 229 or less (ie, if it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 229 or less (ie, if it is 230 to 251), it is determined that "07 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the example of threshold determination shown above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in ascending order of threshold value, so the one determined in the later order threshold is used. It does not fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 or less of the threshold value of the previous order. It is determined whether or not it is in the range of Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown where determination is made as 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in ascending order of threshold value, but conversely, 229, 214, in ascending order of threshold value. It may be determined as 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79. The same applies to the case of performing determination using other threshold values described below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may be always set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even with such a configuration, the range of the determination value is common to at least the variation pattern type for “non-reach out” and the variation pattern type for “super reach”, so “non-reach It can be determined whether or not it becomes "off" or "super reach".

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 designates the EXT data "05 (H)" indicating that the "small hit" will be the symbol designation command A process of setting to is performed (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a small hit threshold (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 251, and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 251 (which is 1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined to set the EXT data “18 (H)” as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of the big hit based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S 1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the big hit type determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8D). Using special symbol) 131a, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "15R positive variation big hit", "10R positive variation big hit", "2R positive variation big hit" or "suddenly positive variation big hit". In addition, when there is a starting winning combination to the second starting winning opening 14 (when performing the winning processing process at step S1228), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (E) Using 131b, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit" or "suddenly probability variation big hit".

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data according to the determination result of the big hit type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that "15R certainty big hit", the CPU 56 performs processing of setting EXT data "01 (H)" indicating that "15R certainty big hit" as a symbol specifying command. If it is determined that "10R probability variation big hit", the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that "10R probability variation big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that "2R probability variation big hit" is found, the CPU 56 sets, as a symbol designation command, EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that "2R probability variation big hit" is to be made. In addition, when it is determined that "the sudden definite big hit" will be, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "04 (H)" indicating that it becomes "the sudden definite big hit" in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for big hit according to the big hit classification determined at Step S229 (Step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it determines that "10R probability variation big hit" or "2R probability variation big hit". In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines that “10 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 149 or less (ie, 75 to 149), it is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In addition, when it is not the threshold value 149 or less (ie, when it is 150 to 251), it is determined to set "12 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Also, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that “15R probability variation big hit”, it sets the thresholds 38 and 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 38 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 38 (ie, 1 to 38). Determines that “13 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that "14 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is not 79 or less (ie, 80 to 251), it is determined to set “15 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Also, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that "a sudden probability big hit", the threshold value 100 is set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 100 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 100 (i.e., 1 to 100). Determines that “16 (H)” is to be set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 100 or less (ie, if it is 101 to 251), it is determined that "17 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 to determine which of the random number values for fluctuation pattern type judgment is. It is determined whether the range is the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, the fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, and the fluctuation pattern type set in step S232 The range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number or any variation pattern type may be determined using the determination table.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data according to the determination result as a variation category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 selects one of “00 (H)” to “0 B (H)”, “10 B (H)”, and “10 (H)” as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. (H) “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command.

  In this embodiment, even when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning determination, it is uniformly determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within which range. If it is determined that a big hit or a small hit will be made, the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be determined. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that it is determined that the winning is determined to be a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variation category command indicating comprehensively a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . And, for example, although it is not shown up to which variation pattern type specifically the microcomputer 100 for effect control, it is indicated that the variation pattern type comprehensively becomes any of the big hit variation pattern types On the basis of the reception of the category command, a pre-reading notice effect to be described later may be executed.

  22 and 23 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration instruction command completed flag is set and the customer waiting is repeated. Control may be performed so as not to send a demo specification command. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  In step S51, CPU 56 confirms whether or not data is set in the first area of the hold specific area instead of checking the value of the total number of hold memories, and if it is set, the hold storage is performed. It may be determined that there is any and processing proceeds to step S52, and if not set, it may be determined that there is no pending storage, and processing may proceed to step S51A.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first data of the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 20A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). If the first data set in the hold specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 selects the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "second" is set to a flag indicating whether the special symbol process process is being performed for the special symbol or the second special symbol is performed (step S53). If the first data set in the hold specific area is data indicating "first" (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  In this embodiment, the process of steps S52 to S54 is executed, and in this embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol according to the starting winning order in which the gaming balls have won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in accordance with the start winning combination in which the game balls have won in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Although the case where it is shown is shown, you may constitute so that priority may be given to change display of either one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. In this case, for example, when shifting to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second start winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15, and the second hold storage tends to be accumulated. The variation display of the special symbol may be executed with priority.

  In addition, when it is constituted so that priority is given to change display of the 2nd special symbol, in the winning a prize production processing which is shown in Figure 21, the value of random number for big hit decision (random R), big hit decision in low probability state Only the process of comparing with the value may be performed, and the comparison with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state may not be performed (specifically, only the process of step S220 is performed and the processes of steps S221 and S222 are You may not do this). With such a configuration, when the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, it is between the determination result of the big hit in the winning determination and the determination result of the big hit at the start of the actual change. Deviation can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and in the pending specific area and the first pending storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective saving areas in the pending specific area and the second pending storage buffer are shifted. Do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1. In addition, the CPU 56 sums up the values (the value indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the suspension specific area. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1 to 8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating that the state is the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating that the state is the high base state is set, the CPU 56 indicates the high probability high base state background Control sending a specified command. Also, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high probability low base state background designation command when only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set. Also, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when starting to change the special symbol, micro control for effect control in the order of background specification command, fluctuation pattern command, display result specification command, total suspension storage number subtraction specification command for each timer interrupt It will be sent to the computer 100. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A total pending storage number subtraction specification command is sent. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in step S 1216 or step S 1227 of the starting opening switch passing process and stored in advance in the first suspension storage buffer or the second suspension storage buffer to perform the jackpot determination. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing for deciding to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, the probability of being a big hit if the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state) than if the gaming state is non-probable change state (normal state) Is configured to be high. Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at the normal time. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is a definite change state is performed based on whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the positive changing state, and is reset when the positive changing state is ended. Specifically, it is determined that "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit" or "suddenly probability variation big hit", and is set in the processing to end the big hit game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, it is reset when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (71 times in this embodiment) is ended.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 8C. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“15R probability variation big hit”, “15 R probability variation big hit,” corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. A 10R probability variation big hit, a 2R probability variation big hit, or a sudden probability variation big hit is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot type determination random number extracted in step S 1216 or step S 1227 of the starting opening switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and determines the big hit type. Do. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, if the big hit type is "15R certainty big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and if the big hit type is "10R certainty big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type If the big hit type is "2R probability variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and if big hit type is "suddenly positive variation big hit", "04" is set as data indicating the big hit type Be done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the decision result of the big hit type, it decides the stop symbol of the special symbol which one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9” becomes the big hit symbol Do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "2R true variation big hit" is determined, the "3" is the stop symbol of the special symbol If you decide and decide to "10R probability variation big hit", decide "7" as the stop symbol of special symbol, and if you decide "15R probability variation big hit", decide "9" as the stop symbol of special symbol . When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9 (A) as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D (FIG. 9 (D ) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). The high base flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state, and is reset when the high base state is ended. Specifically, it is determined that "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit" or "suddenly probability variation big hit", and is set in the processing to end the big hit game. In addition, after the big hit game ends, it is reset when the fluctuation indication of specified number of times (70 times with this execution form) ends.

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S96). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 confirms whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), CPU 56 determines out-of-transition variation pattern type determination table 135A (the table used for determining the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types). FIG. 10A is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss as a table used to determine the type of variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. Step 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used for this purpose, a release variation pattern type determination table 135D (see FIG. 10D) is selected (step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is in the high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, it is controlled to the low probability / high base state) Because there is not, if the high base flag is set, it is high probability / high base state), CPU56, as the table which is used in order to decide fluctuation pattern classification to one of plural types, the fluctuation for deviation The pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S95 to S101, the variation for disconnection shown in FIG. 10 (B). Pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state, the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the change pattern type in the process of step S102 described later, and when the change pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the change is performed in step S105. As a pattern, non-reach PA-1 and shortening fluctuation are determined (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state or the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (refer to FIG. 10C) used in the high probability / high base state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories ( Although the table shown in FIG. 10B is different from the table shown in FIG. 10B, a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is the high base state, if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 (for example, 0 or 0 or 1), The fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 or not, and if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, the variation pattern type for loss The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and performs the processing of steps S92, S94, S98, S99, S100 or S101. The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the selected table (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. And one of the out-of-out variation pattern determination tables 138A (see FIG. 12) (step S103). In addition, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (first reserve storage buffer or second reserve storage buffer) and referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S103, the variation pattern Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S105). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, it may be determined first whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, instead of suddenly determining the type of change pattern. Then, based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination table (including the non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 fluctuation pattern types shown in FIG. 10) and the reach fluctuation pattern type determination table (FIG. 10) Prepare the normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and the super CA 2-7 (including variation pattern types) and select one of the variation pattern type determination tables based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  Further, when it is determined whether or not reach is determined by lottery processing using random numbers for reach determination, the number of reach may be determined according to the total number of pending storages (which may be the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number). A reach determination table with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach probability is lowered as the number of pending storage increases. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table matches, for example, in the determination of whether or not “super reach out” or “non-reach out” in the prize production process. Whether or not to reach may be determined in advance by determining whether or not it is reached. In addition, in view of the fact that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, “super reach deviates” according to the fluctuation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the reach determination random number. It is preferable to configure in advance to determine whether or not to be "non-reach out" and to perform preview advance notice effects.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 13) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 6 specification according to the determined big hit type, small hit, and release. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, when the type of big hit is “15R certainty big hit”, control to transmit the display result 2 designated command is performed (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it is specifically judged by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S 74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01” or not whether it is “15 R certainty big hit” or not. it can. In addition, when the type of the big hit is “10R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it is specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "10 R probability variation big hit" or not. it can. Further, when the type of the big hit is “2R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S115 and S116). In addition, it is specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "03" or not whether it is "2R probability variation big hit" or not. it can. And, when it is not any of "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit" and "2R probability variation big hit" (that is, when it is "sudden probability variation big hit"), the CPU 56 sends control to transmit the designated result 5 command. The operation is performed (step S117).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S118). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S119). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S118), that is, when the small hit flag is out, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S120).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the combined holding memory number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Note that whether or not the total storage reserve number subtraction specification command has already been transmitted, for example, that the total storage retention number subtraction specification command has been sent when transmitting the total storage storage number subtraction specification command in step S1122 described later. The sum holding storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the sum holding storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set may be checked in step S1121. Also, in this case, the set combined holding memory number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset in the special symbol stop processing and the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. do it.

  Next, if the total suspension storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total suspension storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag indicating that it is in the high probability state and the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state, if it is set (step S132). ), Control to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, if the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A 001 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is a sudden definite big hit, a small hit / sudden positive big hit start specification command (command A 002 (H)) is transmitted. In addition, data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (whether big hit type stored in the RAM 55 whether the type of the big hit is "15R positive variation big hit", "10R positive variation big hit", "2R positive variation big hit" or "suddenly positive variation big hit" It is determined based on the data stored in the buffer.

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of opening in the special winning opening opening number counter (for example, 15 times in the case of "15R probability variation big hit". 10 times in "10R probability variation big hit" In the case, it is set twice (step S135). In addition, round time per round in the big hit game is also set. In this case, although the same two rounds are set in the case of the sudden definite big hit and the case of the 2R positive variation big hit, different round times are set. Specifically, in the case of the sudden odds big hit, 0.1 second is set as the round time, and in the case of the 2R definite odds, 29 seconds is set as the round time. In addition, also in the case of 15R definite variation big hit and 10R definite variation big hit, 29 seconds is set as round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S137). Indicates the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the high probability state if the high probability flag is set (that is, if it is a probability change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state)) The value of the high probability frequency counter is decremented by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the high probability frequency counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag (step S140). If the high probability flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S141.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S141). If the high base flag is set (ie, high probability / high base state), the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the high base state is decremented by Step S142). Then, when the value of the high base frequency counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag (step S144). Then, the process proceeds to step S145. When the high base flag is not set, the process directly proceeds to step S145.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / suspiciously positive change big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S 146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S147). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when it is "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit" or "2R probability variation big hit", the big hit end specified command (command A 301 (H)) is sent, and it is "suddenly definite hit" A small hit / sudden definite big hit end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted to. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 sets the high probability flag to shift the gaming state to the high probability state (step S166). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 71 times) in the high probability number counter for counting the number of times of variation display in the high probability state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets the high base flag to shift the gaming state to the high base state (step S168). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) in the high base number counter for counting the number of times of variation display in the high base state (step S169).

  Note that by executing the processing of steps S166 to S169, the state is shifted to the high probability / high base state after the end of the big hit game, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the variable display is finished 70 times. Then, after the big hit is finished, the transition to the high probability / low base state is performed from the end of the 70th variable display until the end of the 71st variable display, and when the 71st variable display is ended, the gaming state is normal Return to

  In this embodiment, the high base flag set in step S168 is also used to determine whether to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or to increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set when the variation display result of the normal symbol is hit in the normal symbol process process (see step S27). If it is set, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by lengthening the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. Further, the high base flag set in step S168 is used to determine whether or not to reduce the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the case of being able to control even a general drawing probability change state in which the probability of making the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol hit is controllable, the high base flag determines whether the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is the hit or not It is also used to make a decision.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S170).

  FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of a program for the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data in the display control processing of step S22 Based on, the latest stop symbol will continue to be displayed stopped until the next variable display is started. In addition, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (ie, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation processing), for the special symbol variation display The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a gap between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, the display result designation command transmission process also varies. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by one.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the fact that the start flag is set, based on the fact that the end flag is set. The special symbol display control data may be set to stop and display the stop symbol.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S 701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 9.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  Next, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S 707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 13 and 14) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process which is executed every 4 ms.

  32 to 35 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 specification command to display result 6 specification command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designating command (command A 001 (H)) (step S 621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a big hit start designating command reception flag (step S 622).

  If the received effect control command is the small hit / suddenly definite oddity big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) (step S623), the CPU 101 for production control sets the small hit / suddenly positive oddity big hit start designation command reception flag (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S 627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S 628).

  If the received effect control command is a power on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S 631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen indicating that the initialization process has been performed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of a predetermined effect pattern.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (a screen for displaying information for notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Control to display is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (command A 301 (H)) (step S641), the CPU for effect control 101 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit / suddenly a definite oddity big hit end designation command (step S645), the CPU 101 for effect control sets a small hit / suddenly positive odd change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designation commands (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the received symbol designation command is the first of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area (step S652).

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the start winning combination command storage area. As shown in FIG. 36, areas (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total number of pending storages are secured in the start winning combination command storage area. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218 to S1221 and S1229 to S1232 of the starting opening switch passing process of FIG. 19, when there is a starting winning combination to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 In one timer interrupt, four commands of symbol designation command, variation category command, start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command), and total pending storage number designation command are set. Sent by Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, the start winning designating command and the total pending storage number designating command can be stored in association. Storage area is secured.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 stores the commands in the order in which they were received, in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area. In this embodiment, since command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning combination designation command and the total hold storage number designation command in one timer interrupt, if the command reception is properly performed, As shown in FIG. 36, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning combination designation command, and the total hold storage number designation command are stored in this order (in FIG. An example is shown in which commands are stored in storage areas 1 to 5).

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, a total pending storage number specification command for specifying a total pending storage number of 7 in a storage area where up to seven pending storages have occurred and the latest command has been stored in the previous variable display C207 (H)) is stored, and then the storage status of the start winning command storage area in a situation where one pending storage is digested and the second variable storage based on the pending storage is started is shown. .

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 is of the effect symbol variation start process to be described later at the timing when the change symbol of the effect symbol is started each time the variation symbol of the effect symbol is started In step S8022, the contents stored in the first storage area 1 are deleted, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted. For example, when the variable display of a new rendering symbol is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 36, each command stored in storage area 1 is deleted, and each command stored in storage area 2 is stored. Each command stored in storage area 3 is shifted to area 1 and shifted to storage area 2. Each command stored in storage area 4 is shifted to storage area 3 and stored in storage area 5. Each command is shifted to storage area 4.

  In addition, an example is shown in the case where the command reception can not be normally performed for storage area 2 in the start winning combination command storage area shown in FIG. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 36, in the storage area 2 of the start winning command storage area, the content of the fourth storage area in which the total reserve storage number specification command should be stored is "0000 (H)" The state of being left is shown.

  Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the command at the time of the start winning stored in the command storage area at the time of starting winning shown in FIG. 36 (design designation command, variation category command, start winning designation command and total number of pending storages) Based on the designated command), the pre-read advance notice effect is set in the pre-read advance notice effect determination process (see step S800A). However, the command at the start winning game (design designation command, variation category command, start prize specifying command and totaling) In the case where a reserve storage number designation command) is missed or inconsistent, the setting of the prefetch advance notice effect is limited until the variation display of reserve storage corresponding to the command at the time of the start winning combination is absorbed. Then, in this embodiment, among the commands at the start winning combination stored in the start winning combination command storage area, the command is received during a period in which the setting of the prefetch advance notice effect is limited (hereinafter, also referred to as a prefetching advance notice setting limited period). For those for which the pre-read advance notice effect setting process was not performed at the timing of the command reception at the start winning combination, as shown in FIG. 36, it is not determined that the pre-read advance notice effect setting process is not performed. Information is set. In the example shown in FIG. 36, regarding the storage areas 2 to 5 of the storage area 2 and subsequent storage areas 2 where the drop of the combined reserve storage number specification command occurred, the value of the undecided information indicates that the pre-reading advance notice effect setting process has not been performed. It is set to 1 ".

  In the present embodiment, "to limit the execution of the advance notice advance effect" does not set the advance advance notice effect for the pending storage corresponding to the start winning combination generated within the advance notice advance setting restriction period. It includes both the concept of not performing the pre-reading preview effect and the concept of preventing the setting and execution of the pre-reading preview effect of some aspects. In this embodiment, as will be described later, with respect to the pending storage corresponding to the start winning combination occurring within the pre-read advance notice setting limited period, only “super reach big hit” and “super reach out” can be executed “ It is made not to set and execute the advance notice announcement of the presentation mode of the countdown, and it can be executed even in the case of “non reach out” “the change of the fluctuation mode at the time of symbol change” and the advance notice of the presentation mode of “mode transition” With regard to the effect, it is possible to set and execute even within the pre-read notice setting limited period.

  Further, in this embodiment, when comprehensively expressing the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start prize designation command and the total number of pending storage number designation commands received at the occurrence of the start winning combination, the command at the starting winning combination is also Say. In addition, among the commands at the time of the start winning combination, the starting winning combination designating command and the total pending storage number specifying command which are commands for designating information capable of recognizing that the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number has increased. When expressed comprehensively, it is also called pending storage information. In addition, whether or not to be a big hit or small hit determined in the winning winning process at the start winning (see FIG. 21), the determination result of the big hit type, a symbol specifying command which is a command showing the determination result of the variation pattern type When expressing the fluctuation category command comprehensively, it is also referred to as a winning judgment result specification command or judgment result information.

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. , And 8 are stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored (step S654). However, if the variation category command, start winning combination designation command, or total pending storage number specification command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol specification command is stored, the variation category command within the current timer interrupt It means that the symbol specification command to be received is dropped before it is received. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM.

  If the received effect control command is the first start winning command designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 receives the received first start winning command command in each of the start winning command storage areas formed in the RAM Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored in the storage area (step S656). However, if the start winning combination designation command or the total pending storage number specification command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol specification command and variation category command are stored, the first start within the current timer interrupt This means that both the symbol designation command and the variation category command to be received prior to the prize designation command have been dropped. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received first start winning designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM.

  If the received effect control command is the second start prize designating command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 receives the received second start prize designating command in each of the start winning command storage areas formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored in the storage area (step S658). However, if the start winning combination designation command and the total pending storage number specification command have already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol specification command and variation category command are stored, the second start is made within the current timer interrupt. This means that both the symbol designation command and the variation category command to be received prior to the prize designation command have been dropped. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received second start winning designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM.

  If the received effect control command is the total hold storage number specification command (step S659), the CPU for effect control 101 receives the total hold storage number specification command received, each of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, and start winning combination designation command are stored in the storage area (step S660). However, if the total hold storage number specification command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol specification command, variation category command, and start winning specification command are stored, the total hold storage within the current timer interrupt It means that all of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the start winning prize designation command to be received prior to the number designation command have been dropped. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received total storage reserve number specification command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM.

  If the received effect control command is the total holding memory number subtraction designation command (step S661), the CPU 101 for effect control erases the first holding display in the total holding memory display unit 18c, and the remaining holding display 1 It shifts one by one, and updates the display of the total number of pending storages in the total pending storage display unit 18c (step S662A). For example, when the first to fifth hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c is lit and displayed, the first hold display is erased when the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is received. And shifts the hold display that was displayed second to the first display area, shifts the hold display that was displayed third to the second display area, and displays the fourth The hold display being done is shifted to the third display area, and the hold display being displayed fifth is shifted to the fourth display area.

  In addition, when it is the 1st special display or 2nd special display which it deletes the retention indication which it deletes CPU for effect control CPU101 mentions later (that is, the reservation object of the advance notice of the advance notice of the presentation feature of the retention sphere change which it mentions later) When the display is deleted) and the deleted display that is deleted is the first normal display or the second normal display described later, the pre-reading advance notice effect of the effect mode of "change of holding ball" is performed on the held display. (Ie, when the effect of changing the color or the shape has been performed, but the color or the shape has not changed as a result and the first normal display or the second normal display has been made), In principle, the pre-reading notice execution flag of “set ball change” is reset (step S 662 B).

  Here, in the present embodiment, there may be a case in which previewed advance notice effects of the effect mode of “change in holding ball” are respectively performed on a plurality of holding balls among the displayed holding balls. In this case, even if the holding ball for which the effect has been performed is erased, if the holding ball for which the effect has been performed is displayed later, the flag for “preserving notice change in holding ball” is still set. Do. That is, in the present embodiment, in the case (or when performed) the prefetching notice effect of the effect mode of "change in holding ball" is performed for at least one of the holding balls displayed after the deletion in S662B, It is assumed that the pre-reading notice running flag according to “hold ball change” is set, and pre-read notice effect of “hold ball change” presentation mode is not performed for all hold displays displayed after deletion On the condition that (and will not be performed), it is assumed that the "preserving notice change in progress flag" flag is reset.

  If the received effect control command is a wait for customer demonstration specification command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a wait for customer demonstration screen predetermined on the effect display device 9 (step S664). It should be noted that the customer waiting demo specification screen is not immediately displayed based on the reception of the customer waiting demo specification command, but after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting demo specification command is received, the customer is The display of the waiting demo screen may be started.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designating command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to be displayed on the background screen according to the normal state (for example, blue display color) It changes to background screen) (step S667). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the high probability state flag indicating that the gaming state is in the high probability state, and the high base state flag indicating that the gaming state is in the high base state ( Step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / high base state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 responds to the high probability / high base state of the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 The screen is changed to a background screen (for example, a background screen of red display color) (step S670). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the high probability state flag and sets the high base state flag (step S 671).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / low base state background designation command (step S 672), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the probability variation state (for example, , And the background screen of the orange display color) (step S673). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the high probability state flag (step S 674) and resets the high base state flag (step S 675).

  If the received effect control command is the special winning opening open designation command (step S 678), the effect control CPU 101 sets the special winning opening open flag (step S 679). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening open designation command in the special opening open opening designated command storage area formed in the RAM (step S 680). In addition, the microcomputer 100 for effect control recognizes the number of rounds in the big hit game by confirming the large winning opening open designated command stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area. Can.

  If the received effect control command is a designated command after opening the special winning opening (step S681), the CPU 101 for effect control sets a flag after opening the special winning opening (step S682). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening after open designation command in the RAM after the special winning opening after open designated command storage area (step S683).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S684). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes an advance notice effect determination process for determining the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the effect mode (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of the processes in steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process processing, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the change display of the effect symbol, but the control relating to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second The control regarding the fluctuation display of the production design synchronized with the fluctuation of the special design is also executed in one production control process processing. In addition, even if it is configured to execute the variation display of the production symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variation display of the production symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol by another effect control process process. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which of the special symbols is displayed depending on which of the effect control process processing is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S803): The change of the effect pattern is stopped and control is performed to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 38 to FIG. 40 are flowcharts showing pre-reading advance notice effect determination processing (step S800A). In the preview advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not at least one of the commands at the time of start winning has been newly received (step S6001). Specifically, whether or not at least one of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start prize designation command or a total pending storage number designation command is newly stored in the start prize winning command storage area shown in FIG. It can confirm by judging. If any command has not been received anew, the process ends.

  If at least one of the commands at the time of starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the prefetch notice execution flag other than the prefetch notice execution flag of "hold ball change" is set. (Step S6002). Note that the pre-reading advance notice executing flag is set in steps S6014, S6019E, S6029, and S8012 described later. If one of the pre-reading notice execution flags other than the pre-reading notice execution flag of “retention ball change” is set (Y), the process proceeds to step S6020.

  It should be noted that, by executing the process of step S6002, in this embodiment, the process of determining the advance announcement notice effect is executed on the condition that the advance announcement notice effect other than "hold ball change" is not executed. Then, after the prefetching preview effect other than the "hold ball change" is started, since the prefetch notice executing flag other than the "hold ball change" has already been set, the process of determining the preview advance effect is executed again. Instead, the preview advance notice effect is executed in the effect mode already determined. In other words, in the present embodiment, although the pre-read advance notice effect of “hold ball change” is executed, when other pre-read advance notice effects are not executed, the pre-read advance notice effect (“hold ball change” is newly included) Can be performed. Therefore, it is also possible to change the aspect (color or shape) of the plurality of holding balls being displayed to perform the advance notice. In addition, when the start prize becoming a super reach or a big hit occurs while executing the advance notice announcement production based on the judgment result at the time of winning of “non reach out”, switching from the execution of the advance notice announcement effect to the super reach Alternatively, a jackpot effect (for example, reach notice or jackpot notice) may be executed. It should be noted that the process of determining the presence / absence of the flag for the advance notice before execution other than “hold ball change” in step S6002 is not provided, regardless of whether the advance notice effect other than “hold ball change” is being executed. The processing after step S6003 may be executed.

  If the pre-reading notice executing flag other than “hold ball change” is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag indicating that it is the pre-reading notice setting restriction period is set. (Step S6003). If the pre-reading advance notice setting restriction flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6020. That is, during the pre-read notice setting restriction period, execution of the pre-read notice effect is limited by not transitioning to the process for setting the pre-read notice effect in steps S6004 to S6019F.

  If the prefetch advance notice setting restriction flag is not set, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms the contents of the latest start winning command stored in the start winning time command storage area, and the commands at the starting winning prize are ordered At step S6004, it is confirmed whether all the information has been received.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, four commands of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start prize designation command and a total pending storage number designation command are batched into one timer interrupt as a command at the start prize. The MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) in the start winning command storage area, respectively. , And a command that is “C2 (H)” should be stored (see FIG. 14). Therefore, if any of these MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 can determine that the command was missed due to noise or data corruption of the MODE data, and the command could not be received correctly. .

  Further, in this embodiment, since the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning combination designation command and the total hold storage number designation command are to be received in order, the MODE data is stored in the start winning command storage area. C4 (H), C6 (H), C0 (H) (or "C1 (H)"), and C2 (H) should be stored in this order. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 stores "C6 (H)" before "C4 (H)" if the order is different even if all the MODE data is stored (for example, "C6 (H)" is stored). (For example), it can be determined that the command could not be received correctly due to noise or data corruption of MODE data.

  If it is determined that the received start winning combination commands are not in order or some are missing, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6023. If it is determined that all the commands at the start winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 matches the contents of the latest symbol designation command and the variation category command stored in the start winning command storage area. It is confirmed whether or not (step S6005). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a gap is stored as a symbol designation command, a variation category 1 command to a variation category 12 command corresponding to a variation as a variation category command One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 15 and 16). Nevertheless, if a variation category 21 command to a variation category 29 command (see FIG. 17) corresponding to a big hit or sudden definite variation big hit and a small hit are stored, the effect control CPU 101 performs a symbol designation command and variation It can be determined that the contents of the category command are not consistent and there is a contradiction.

  If it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command do not match, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6023. If it is determined that the contents of the symbol designating command and the variation category command are consistent, the effect control CPU 101 determines the latest start winning designating command and the total number of pending storages stored in the start winning winning command storage area It is checked whether the contents with the designated command are consistent (step S6006). Specifically, a first start winning designation command designating that there has been a start winning for the first start winning opening 13 and a second starting winning for designating that there has been a start winning for the second start winning opening 14 If the combined hold storage number indicated by the EXT data of the combined hold storage number specification command stored in the start winning winning command storage area is 0 although the specified command is stored, effect control The CPU 101 can determine that the contents of the start winning combination designation command and the total suspension storage number designation command are not consistent and there is a contradiction.

  In this embodiment, when any one of the determination processes in steps S6004 to S6006 determines N, the process proceeds to step S6023 and proceeds to the prefetch advance notice effect setting restriction period. But this is not the only case. For example, the process may proceed to step S6023 to shift to the preview advance notice effect setting restriction period on condition that any of the determination processes in steps S6004 to S6006 is determined to be N, It is also possible to shift to step S6023 and shift to the previewing advance notice effect setting restriction period on condition that the determination is N in all the determination processing of S6006.

  Further, the program does not necessarily have to be configured to provide all three determination processes of steps S6004 to S6006, and the program may be configured to provide only one determination process of steps S6004 to S6006. Alternatively, the program may be configured to provide only two determination processes of steps S6004 to S6006.

  If it is determined that the contents of the start winning combination designation command and the total suspension storage number designation command do not match, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6023. If it is determined that the contents of the start winning combination designation command and the total number of pending storage number designation commands are consistent, the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether the high probability state flag is set (step S6007). . If the high probability state flag is not set, the CPU 101 for production control selects the prefetch notice distribution table A as a table for determining the presence / absence of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the advance notice effect (step S6008). If the high probability state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the prefetch notice distribution table B (step S6009).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for preview advance notice effect mode determination for determining a play mode for preview advance notice effect, and based on the received variation category command, the value of the extracted random number for preview action notice mode determination By determining which judgment value is included in the pre-reading notice distribution table selected in steps S6008 and S6009, it is determined whether or not pre-reading notice effect is performed and an effect mode (step S6010).

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a pre-reading notice distribution table indicating the distribution of pre-reading notice effects. If the current gaming state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 101 is indicated by the received variation category command using the pre-read advance notice distribution table A in the normal state shown in FIG. 41A selected in step S6008. Based on the winning determination result of the fluctuation pattern type, the effect mode of the advance notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the prefetch notice distribution table A, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a change pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1 by a change category command (that is, a specific effect such as reach is also a pseudo sequence). In the case where the determination result at the time of winning showing that “non-reach will be lost” not accompanied is also shown (specifically, when the command C 600 (H) is received), FIG. As shown in the figure, it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect of the effect mode of "change in change pattern at symbol change", "mode transition" or "hold ball change".

  Further, for example, when the winning determination result indicating that “normal reach is lost” is indicated by the variation category command, the effect control CPU 101 indicates “during symbol variation” as shown in FIG. 41A. It is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect of the effect mode of any of “change in mode of change”, “mode transition” or “hold ball change”. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 is shown a determination result at the time of winning showing that the variation category command becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-1 or normal CA 3-2 (that is, “normal reach big hit”). As shown in FIG. 41A (specifically, when the command C610 (H), the command C611 (H), the command C613 (H), or the command C614 (H) is received), In addition, it is decided to execute the advance notice of the presentation mode of the effect mode of “change in change pattern at the time of symbol change”, “mode transition” or “hold ball change”.

  Further, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the winning category determination result indicates that the variation category command is to be the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 (that is, “super reach is lost”) (specifically, Specifically, when command C 607 (H) is received, as shown in FIG. 41A, “change in change pattern at symbol change”, “mode transition” or “hold ball change” It is decided to carry out the advance notice announcement of any of the presentation modes. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the winning combination determination result indicates that the variation control command of the effect control CPU 101 is to be the change pattern type of the super CA3-3 (that is, it becomes the “super reach big hit”) by the change category command (specifically Specifically, when command C 612 (H) or command C 615 (H) is received, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), “change in change pattern at symbol change”, “mode transition” , “Countdown” or “hold ball change”, it is decided to carry out the advance notice of the presentation mode.

  In addition, the specific content of the presentation aspect of each pre-reading advance notice production of "the change of the change form at the time of symbol change", "mode transition", "countdown", and "hold ball change" is mentioned later.

  Also, if the current gaming state is a definite change state, the effect control CPU 101 receives the change category command received using the advance notice distribution table B in the positive change state shown in FIG. 41 (B) selected in step S6009. Based on the winning-time determination result of the variation pattern type indicated by, the effect mode of the advance notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, in the case of using the pre-read notice distribution table B, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a change pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1 by a change category command (that is, a specific effect such as reach is also pseudo-connected). 41B (specifically, when the command C60A (H) is received), it is shown in FIG. As shown in, it is determined that there is no allocation for the pre-read advance notice effect of any of the effect modes, and that pre-read advance notice is not performed.

  Further, for example, when the winning determination result indicating that “normal reach is lost” is indicated by the variation category command, the effect control CPU 101 indicates “during symbol variation” as shown in FIG. 41 (B). It is decided to execute the advance notice of the presentation mode of any of the presentation mode of the "change form of change" or "hold ball change". In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation category command becomes the variation pattern type of the normal CA 3-1 or the normal CA 3-2 (that is, it becomes “normal reach big hit”). (Specifically, when the command C610 (H), the command C611 (H), the command C613 (H), or the command C614 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. As described above, it is decided to execute the advance notice of the presentation mode of the presentation mode of either "change in change pattern at symbol change" or "change in holding ball".

  Further, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the winning category determination result indicates that the variation category command is to be the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 (that is, “super reach is lost”) (specifically, Specifically, in the case where command C 609 (H) or command C 60 B (H) is received, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), “change in change form at symbol change” or “hold ball change” It is decided to execute the pre-read advance notice effect of any of the effect modes. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the winning combination determination result indicates that the variation control command of the effect control CPU 101 is to be the change pattern type of the super CA3-3 (that is, it becomes the “super reach big hit”) Specifically, when command C 612 (H) or command C 615 (H) is received, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), “change in change pattern at symbol change”, “countdown” or It is decided to execute the advance notice of the presentation mode of any of the presentation modes of "change in holding ball".

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, it is determined that “non reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit” as a determination result of winning of the change pattern type according to the change category command. When a result is indicated, a pre-reading notice effect may be performed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, in this embodiment, the advance notice of the “countdown” presentation mode is selected only when the winning determination result is “super reach big hit”. Be done. Therefore, in the case where preview advance notice effect is executed in the "countdown" effect mode, it is determined that a big hit will be made at least in the variable display targeted for the determination at the time of winning, and the interest for the game can be improved.

  In step S6010, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 confirm whether or not the big hit game is in progress, and if it is in the big hit game, it is desirable to determine not to execute the advance notice effect in advance. In addition, whether or not the big hit game is in progress, for example, it is confirmed whether the value of the effect control process flag is a value (specifically, 4 to 7) indicating the big hit display processing to the big hit end production processing. It can judge by doing. The same applies to steps S6027 and S8010 described later.

  In addition, even during the big hit game, it may be configured to be able to execute the advance notice effect. For example, instead of the timing at which the start winning is generated and the command at the starting winning is received, the symbol specifying command or variation stored in the start winning command storage area in a specific round (for example, 10 rounds) in the big hit game The category command may be read out to determine whether or not to execute preview advance notice effects, and the prefetch advance notice effects may be executed in the specific round. In this case, a so-called one-shot notification mode may be executed as a preview advance notice effect informing that the big hit will be determined in the variable display after the end of the current big hit game, for example, instead of the effect of the continuous mode. Only the pre-reading advance notice effect similar to “hold ball change” may be executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute pre-reading advance notice effect (step S6011). For example, when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect because the pre-reading pre-notice distribution tables A and B are not distributed, the process proceeds to step S6020.

  When it is determined to execute the advance notice advance effect, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the advance notice effect of the effect mode other than the “hold ball change” (step S6012) . If it is determined to execute the advance notice of the presentation mode other than the “retention ball change”, the process proceeds to step S6013.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts all of the variation category commands stored in the start winning command storage area, and stores it as the winning determination result for the first start winning based on the extracted variation category commands. It is checked whether or not all the change category commands are change category 1 commands (command C600 (H). Non-reach CA2-1 designation) (step S6013). If all are variation category 1 commands, the process moves to step S6014. If at least one change category command other than the change category 1 command is included, the process proceeds to step S6020 without executing the processes of steps S6014 and S6015.

  By performing the process of step S6013, in this embodiment, the prefetching notice effect (on the condition that all of the respective variable displays until the variable display to be notified) is also "non-reach out" It is configured to be executable (except for “hold ball change”). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the continuity of the pre-read advance notice effect is impaired by the reach effect interrupting in the middle of the pre-read advance notice effect (except for “retention ball change”). The same applies to the processing of steps S6024 and S8007 described later. However, since there is not much problem of continuity of the presentation about the advance notice announcement of the presentation mode of the "hold ball change" to be described later among the advance announcement notice effects, the advance notice advance effect of the presentation mode other than "hold ball change" The processing of step S6013 is executed only when it is executed, and the preview advance notice effect can be executed on the condition that "non-reach out" is set for all the variable displays until the variable display to be notified is started. doing. It should be noted that the process of determining whether or not all the variable displays up to the advance notice target in step S6013 are the change category 1 is not provided, and whether all the change displays up to the advance notice target are "non-reach out". Alternatively, the processing after step S6014 may be performed.

  If all the change category 1 commands have been received in step S6013, the effect control CPU 101 sets an advance warning in-progress executing flag indicating that the execution of the advance notice effect is determined according to the effect mode determined in step S6010 S6014). In this case, for example, a prefetch warning flag under execution of "change in change form at symbol change" indicating that the determined effect form is "change in change form at symbol change", or the determined effect form is The "prediction previewing execution flag of" mode transition "indicating that it is" mode transition "and the prefetch notification execution flag of" countdown "indicating that the determined effect mode is" countdown "are set.

  In this embodiment, the "pre-reading notice executing flag of" change in variation pattern at symbol change ", the pre-reading notice executing flag of" mode transition ", the pre-reading notice executing flag of" countdown ", and The prefetching in-progress execution flag of “retention sphere change” indicating that the effect mode is “retention sphere change” is generically referred to as a prefetching in-progress executing flag.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the advance notice notification effect based on the reception of the variation category 1 command shown in FIG. A confirmation flag is set to indicate that the execution of the advance notice effect is determined based on the winning determination. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the advance notice announcement effect on the basis of the reception of the variation category command indicating that “normal reach is lost”, the winning is achieved when “normal reach is lost”. A confirmation flag is set to indicate that the execution of the advance notice effect has been determined based on the time determination. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the advance notice announcement effect based on the fluctuation category 21 command shown in FIG. 17 or the fluctuation category 24 command being received, “normal reach big hit” is set. Then, a confirmation flag indicating that the execution of the advance notice effect has been determined is set based on the determination at the time of winning. In addition, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the advance notice of the advance notice effect based on the reception of the fluctuation category 8 command, the fluctuation category 10 command, and the fluctuation category 12 command illustrated in FIG. When "super reach is lost", a confirmation flag is set indicating that the execution of the advance notice effect is determined based on the determination at the time of winning. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the advance notice announcement effect based on the fluctuation category 23 command shown in FIG. 17 or the fluctuation category 26 command being received, “super reach big hit” When it becomes, the flag for confirmation which shows having decided execution of preliminary announcement advance production based on having judged at the time of winning is set.

  Also, for example, in the case where the confirmation flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), by setting a predetermined bit of the confirmation flag to a value specifying which effect mode it is, It may be possible to specify which rendering mode is determined. Note that these confirmation flags are reset on the condition that the prefetch warning in progress flag being set in step S8316 or S662B is reset.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 sets the current total number of pending storages in the change number counter (step S6015), and the process shifts to step S6020. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total number of pending storage numbers designated by the latest total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning winning command storage area in the variation frequency counter. The fluctuation number counter is a counter for counting the number of fluctuation displays to be executed before the start of the fluctuation display, which is the target of the judgment of the preview advance notice effect. In this embodiment, when the execution of the advance notice announcement effect is determined during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol and the fluctuation number counter is set in step S6015 or step S6030 described later, the execution is first performed during the execution. At the end of the variable display, the value of the variable number counter is decremented by 1 (see step S8312), and as a result, the value of the variable number counter is 1 to the previous variable display of the variable display targeted for winning determination. It becomes 0 and pre-reading advance notice production ends. In step S6015 or step S6030 described later, when the variation display of the effect pattern is not being performed, the effect control CPU 101 may set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current number of pending storages in the variation frequency counter. desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to make sure that the preview advance notice effect is completed by the time before the variable display which is the target of the variable display which has been the target of the winning determination, and the variable display which is the target of the winning determination. In both of the pre-read advance notice effect and the super reach effect are executed, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming irritably unnatural.

  In this embodiment, if the effect mode of the determined advance notice effect is “change in holding ball”, it is determined as NO in S6012, and the process proceeds to S6016. Therefore, when the effect mode of the determined advance notice effect is “change in holding ball”, step S6015 is not performed and the change number counter is not set. In addition, when the advance notice notice effect of the effect mode of the "retention ball change" is determined, the processing of steps S6016 to S6019F to be described later is executed, and the start winning occurs and the command at the starting winning is received With the start of the variable display to be started later, the advance notice of staging ball change will be started. Then, when the hold display changes to the special display, the special display continues until the variable display related to the hold display of the special display is started. That is, at the timing of starting the variable display of the advance notice target, the hold indication of the advance notice target is erased from the addition hold storage display unit 18c based on the reception of the addition hold storage number subtraction designation command (steps S661 to S662B Reference), will end pre-reading notice.

  In the pre-read advance notice distribution table shown in FIG. 41, the allocation is performed so that the selection ratio of each of the presentation modes is different according to the reliability of the big hit. For example, the reliability of becoming a big hit in the order of "change in change pattern at symbol change", "mode transition", and "hold ball change" becomes higher (for example, in order of 20%, 40%, 60%) Allocation of the presentation mode is performed (in the case of "countdown", the big hit is determined). In addition, the allocation method of each effect mode that becomes the big hit reliability is not limited to such order, for example, "reverse ball change", "mode transition", and "change pattern at symbol change" in reverse order. The allocation may be performed in the order of “changes of Furthermore, even if it arranges in such arrangement order that the reliability in which the production mode of "mode transition" becomes the most big hit becomes high, and conversely the reliability becoming the most big hit becomes low, for example Well, it is possible how to allocate various various presentation aspects.

  As shown in steps S6016 to S6019F, when the CPU 101 for effect control returns to step S6012 and confirms that it is decided to execute the advance notice of the effect mode of "change in holding ball" (NO in step S6012) In addition, the effect determination process in the advance notice of the holding ball change is performed.

(Preliminary notice effect of holding ball change)
Here, the advance notice announcement effect of "the holding ball change" in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59 to FIG. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality (two) of rendering systems in which targets of the preview differ with respect to the previewed preview effect of the holding ball change. One is a directing system that suggests the possibility of a big hit (big hit expectation), and the other is a directing system that indicates the possibility of super reach (super reach expectation). As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the jackpot expectation varies depending on the color of the holding ball. If the big hit expectation is low, the color of the holding ball does not change due to the advance notice effect (that is, white for the first hold memory, gray for the second hold memory), and if the big hit expectation is moderate. The color of the holding ball becomes blue due to the pre-reading notice effect, and the color of the holding ball becomes red due to the pre-reading notice effect if the big hit expectation is high. Also, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the super reach expectation varies depending on the shape of the holding ball. If the degree of super reach expectation is low, the holding ball does not change (does not break) by the prefetching notice effect, and if the degree of the super reach expectation is high, the holding ball is cracked by the lookahead notice effect ).

  In this embodiment, a predetermined character (a dwarf or a giant) appears as an effect at the time of changing the color or shape of the holding ball, and the holding ball displayed is colored or displayed with a brush. The effect of breaking the ball with a hammer is to change the color or shape of the holding ball. Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when a dwarf appears, the color or shape of the holding ball hardly changes, and when the giant appears, the color or shape of the holding ball changes. The production has been assigned to make it easy. In addition, when a small person appears, the color of the holding ball is unlikely to change (that is, it is difficult to change from white or gray to blue or red), and the shape of the holding ball is unlikely to change (that is, it is difficult to be broken) When the giants appear, the color of the ball is likely to change (ie, change from white or gray to blue or red), and the shape of the ball is likely to change (ie, break). It is easy to allocate the effects.

  The first hold effect (hold ball color change effect) in the present embodiment is a plurality of types of effects (brushes) in which the display mode (color) of the hold ball is changed to the first display mode (no change, blue, red) There is a low rate of color change in the effect that a dwarf with a character appears, and a high rate of color change in the effect of a giant with a brush. Has a plurality of effects with different proportions of changing the display mode (shape) of the holding ball to the second display mode (not broken, broken) (the appearance of a dwarf with a hammer changes the shape The rate of change is low, and the effect that a giant with a hammer appears has a high rate of changing the shape).

  FIG. 60 shows an example of the notice effect of the holding ball change in the present embodiment. In the example of FIG. 60, three holding balls are displayed on the total holding storage display unit 18c, and in the state in which the effect pattern is variably displayed, the advance notice of the holding ball change is performed. As shown in FIG. 60 (1), a dwarf character 1100 having a brush 1110 and a paint-filled bucket 1120 is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the character 1100 approaches the third holding ball 1000 from the left. Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (2), the ditch performs a coloring operation using the paint of the bucket 1120 with the brush 1110 on the holding ball 1000. In this example, it is assumed that the white holding ball 1000 is red. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (3), the character 1100 of the dwarf who has finished painting is left and is not displayed on the effect display device 9. In this example, since the white holding ball 1000 turns to red, the player recognizes that the jackpot expectation is high, and can play the game with the jackpot expectation and interest.

  FIG. 61 shows an example of the notice effect of the holding ball change in the present embodiment. In the example of FIG. 61, three holding balls are displayed on the total holding storage display unit 18c, and in the state in which the effect pattern is variably displayed, the advance notice of the holding ball change is performed. As shown in FIG. 61 (1), a giant character 1200 holding a hammer 1210 is displayed on the effect display device 9, and this character 1200 approaches the third holding ball 1000 from the left. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the giant divides the holding ball 1000 by the hammer 1210. In this example, the holding ball 1000 is broken, and the letter S that suggests super reach appears from the inside. That is, the shape of the pending display changes. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the character of the giant that has finished dividing the holding ball is left and is not displayed on the effect display device 9. In this example, since the holding ball 1000 is broken and the holding display changes to the shape of S, the player recognizes that the super reach expectation is high, and the player can play the game with the feeling and interest of the super reach. . As described above, by providing effects of a plurality of systems as pre-reading advance notice effects of the aspect of “hold ball change”, the player can be made to have an interest.

  In the present embodiment, display processing of characters of a dwarf or a giant is performed so that the holding ball displayed on the total holding storage display unit 18c is not hidden. The dwarf has a small area in the image displayed on the effect display 9, and the giant is large. Also, the color assigned to the dwarf is highly transparent, and the giant is less transparent. Furthermore, the dwarf character and the giant character have contrasting characteristics, such as a dwarf moves faster and a giant moves slower.

  Next, the effect determination process shown in steps S6016 to S6019F will be described. In step S6016, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the latest start winning combination designation command stored in the start winning combination command storage area is a first start winning combination designation command. If the first start prize designation command is stored, the effect control CPU 101 increases the first normal display by one as a hold display on the total hold storage display unit 18c (step S6017A).

  If the latest start prize designation command is not the first start prize designation command (that is, if the second start prize designation command is stored), the effect control CPU 101 holds the hold on the combined hold storage display unit 18c. As a display, the second normal display is incremented by one (step S6017B). As described above, in the present embodiment, even when it is determined that the advance notice of the effect mode of "the holding ball change" is to be made, the first normal display or the second normal display is increased at one end (for example, 54 (2).

  After step S6017A or step S6017B, the effect control CPU 101 determines which of the effect of changing the color of the holding ball or the effect of changing the shape of the holding ball, for the advance notice of the effect mode of "change in holding ball" It determines (step S6018A). For example, in step S6018A, the effect control CPU 101 determines an effect system for determining an effect system (whether "color change" or "shape change" is to be performed) in the case of performing preview advance notice effect of "hold ball change". A random number is extracted at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of reception of a command at one of the start winnings), and if the value of the extracted rendering system determination random number is even, "color change"; if odd, "shape change It is good to decide "".

  In the present embodiment, when “color change” is determined, the display mode (in this example, color) of the holding ball is changed as shown in FIG. 62A, and when “shape change” is determined, As shown in 62 (b), the display mode (shape in this example) of the holding ball is changed. Then, as described later, as a first holding effect to be performed on the holding ball when changing the color of the holding ball, as shown in FIG. 63, an operation in which a dwarf or a giant paints the holding ball with a brush As a second hold effect to be performed on the hold ball when changing the shape of the hold ball, as shown in FIG. 64, an operation in which a dwarf or a giant breaks the hold ball by a hammer. The effect to do is provided. That is, when changing the display mode (color) of the hold display (hold ball) to the first display mode (no change, blue, red) based on the fact that it is decided to execute the first preview effect (color change) The first holding effect (the effect shown in FIG. 63) is executed on the holding display (the holding ball) and the second warning effect (the shape change) is determined to be performed, the holding display (the holding ball) When the display mode (shape) is changed to the second display mode (not broken, split), the second hold effect (the effect shown in FIG. 64) is executed on the hold display (hold ball).

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, in the first holding effect and the second holding effect, a character of a dwarf or a giant appears in both cases, and the holding ball is displayed. Immediately after performing a predetermined operation (painting or splitting), the display mode of the holding ball changes (color change or shape change). That is, an example is shown in which the first holding effect or the second holding effect and the timing at which the display mode of the holding ball changes are continuous. However, the timings of the first holding effect or the second holding effect and the change of the holding ball may not be continuous. For example, a dwarf or a giant performs a predetermined action on the holding ball, and the dwarf or the giant After leaving the screen, that is, after the predetermined time has passed from the first holding effect or the second holding effect, the holding ball may be changed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, in the first holding effect and the second holding effect, a character of a dwarf or a giant appears in any of the holding balls to be notified. The example which changes the display mode of a holding ball is shown by performing predetermined | prescribed operation | movement (painting or dividing | dividing) to the said holding ball after approaching with respect to it. As these first holding effect and second holding effect, for example, a non-contact effect in which the character moves around the holding ball to be notified may be performed, and the holding ball to be notified may be displayed. An effect of pointing to a certain position (for example, a character displayed at a predetermined position may point to the holding ball or deform toward the holding ball without approaching the holding ball) may be performed. In addition, the holding ball for which the character is to be notified may be hidden temporarily, and the display mode may be changed when the holding ball appears again. Furthermore, the first holding effect and the second holding effect are not limited to the approach to the holding ball to be notified, or to perform a predetermined action on the holding ball, for example, a character appears and the holding ball is to be notified However, the display mode of the holding ball may be changed as the character appears.

(Determination of color of holding ball)
When “color change” is determined as the effect system in step S6018A (Y), the effect control CPU 101 determines the color of the holding ball after the advance notice of the holding ball change based on the random X ( Step S6018 B). As described above, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter when any start winning game command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, and the value of the extracted value is randomly X And In the present embodiment, the random X is any value from 1 to 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 uses the color of the holding ball after passing through the advance notice of the holding ball change (that is, after the appearance of the character) based on the distribution table at the time of color change determination shown in FIG. Decide. Here, the effect control CPU 101 is a symbol designation command (for example, C401 (H), C402 (H), or C403 (H) that is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of a 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variation big hit. ) Is selected, the table of the judgment value (upper part in FIG. 62 (a)) in which the color of the holding ball becomes blue or red with high probability is selected, and the symbol designation command other than the above (eg C400 (H) etc.) is selected. When it is received, the table (the lower part of FIG. 62 (a)) of the determination value in which the color of the holding ball does not change with high probability is selected. Note that each table shown in FIG. 62 and FIGS. 63 and 64 described later is stored in the ROM accessible by the effect control CPU 101.

  In this example, when the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designating command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of a so-called real ball having a big hit 2R, 10R, or 15R certainty big hit, random X The value of 1 to 5 does not change the color of the holding ball, the color of the holding ball is blue if it is 6 to 30 and the color of the holding ball is red if it is 31 to 100. I assume. Therefore, the color of the holding ball after the appearance of the character does not change with a probability of 5%, changes to blue with a probability of 25%, and changes to red with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command other than the above, if the value of the random X is in the range of 1 to 96, the color of the holding ball is not changed, and if it is the range of 97 to 99 The color of the holding ball is blue, and if it is 100, the color of the holding ball is red. Therefore, the color of the holding ball after the appearance of the character does not change with a probability of 96%, changes to blue with a probability of 3%, and changes to red with a probability of 1%.

  As described above, when a symbol specifying command indicating a 2R, 10R, or 15R probability big hit that is a real rising ball is received, the color of the holding ball changes to red or blue with high probability, and a symbol specifying command other than the above is specified. When you receive, the color of the ball will not change with high probability. Therefore, the player must have an interest in knowing the expectation of the jackpot and the jackpot depending on whether or not the color of the holding ball changes after the appearance of the character, and on what color the player changes the color. Can.

  After determining the color of the holding ball in step S6018B, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the holding ball of a color having a higher degree of expectation than that of the determined color is displayed (step S6018C). ). Here, the effect control CPU 101 stores a table for holding ball display processing (for example, see FIGS. 65 and 66 described later) in the RAM. The table is displayed in the display area corresponding to the display areas (display area 1, display area 2,..., Display area 8 from the left of the screen) of the respective holding balls in the total holding storage display unit 18 c. Display modes (1st normal display, 2nd normal display, 1st special display (blue), 2nd special display (blue), 1st special display (red), 2nd special display (red), 2nd display mode) (1) Special display (S), second special display (S), dropout mode, or non-display), holding for indicating whether or not holding ball change presentation has been performed for the holding ball displayed in the display area A ball change effect flag and an effect number of a hold ball change effect executed or executed for the holding ball displayed in the display area are stored.

  This effect number is attached corresponding to the color change of the holding ball as shown in FIG. 63. In this example, the effect number A0X shows no change in the color of the holding ball, and the effect number A1X turns the color of the holding ball blue. The change, effect number A2X is an effect that changes the color of the holding ball to red. Therefore, in step S6018C, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the table for holding ball display processing in the RAM to determine whether or not the holding ball of a color having a higher degree of expectation than the determined color in step S6018B is displayed. Can be confirmed. For example, when the determined color is "no change" and the effect number A1X (corresponding to blue) or A2X (corresponding to red) is stored in the table for holding ball display processing, YES is determined in S6018C. In addition, for example, when the determined color is “blue”, when the effect number A2X (corresponding to red) is stored in the holding ball display processing table, it is determined as YES in S6018C. If it is determined YES in S6018C, the process ends. As described above, when the high-predictive-prediction advance notice effect is performed, the lower-predictive pre-read advance notice effect is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered by the frequent occurrence of the pre-reading notice, and to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced by the pre-reading notice having a low degree of expectation.

(Determination of color change presentation)
The effect control CPU 101 determines the effect based on the random Y when confirming that the holding ball of the color having a higher degree of expectation than the determined color is not displayed (and not displayed) in step S6018 C (step S) S6018 D). As described above, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter when any start winning game command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, and the value of the extracted value is randomly set to Y. And In the present embodiment, the random Y is any value from 1 to 100.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect number based on the effect distribution table at the color determination time shown in FIG. Here, when receiving the symbol designating command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of the 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 101 selects the table on the left side shown in FIG. When a symbol designation command other than the symbol designation command is received, the table on the right side shown in FIG. 63 ("other than the left case") is selected.

  In this example, when the determined color is "no change" and the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of the 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variation big hit, If the value of random Y is in the range of 1 to 50, the effect number A01 is selected, if it is the range of 51 to 90, the effect number A02 is selected, if it is the range of 91 to 100, the effect number A03 is selected . On the other hand, when the determined color is "no change" and the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command other than the above, if the value of the random Y is in the range of 1 to 60, the effect number A01 is selected If the range is 61 to 95, the effect number A02 is selected, and if the range is 96 to 100, the effect number A03 is selected. Here, effect numbers A01 and A02 are effects that only a dwarf appears, and these appear with a high probability of 90% (left table) or 95% (right table) when the determined color is "no change". On the other hand, the effect number A03 is an effect in which only a giant appears, which appears only with a low probability of 10% (left table) or 5% (right table) in the case of "no change". Therefore, when the effect of "no change" is performed, the probability that only a small person appears is set extremely high.

  Further, in this example, when the determined color is "blue" and the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of the 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variation big hit. The effect number A11 is selected if the value of random Y is in the range of 1 to 40, the effect number A12 is selected if the value is in the range of 41 to 80, and the effect number A13 is selected if in the range of 81 to 100 Do. On the other hand, when the determined color is "blue" and the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command other than the above, if the value of random Y is in the range of 1 to 35, the effect number A11 is selected, If it is in the range of 36 to 70, the effect number A12 is selected, and if it is in the range of 71 to 100, the effect number A13 is selected. Here, the effect number A11 is an effect in which only a giant appears, which appears with a probability of 40% (left table) or 35% (right table) when the determined color is blue. On the other hand, with regard to effect number A12, after the appearance of a dwarf, the dwarf paints the color of the holding ball but the color of the holding ball does not change, after that the dwarf returns and a giant appears and the giant is It is an effect that the color is put on and the holding ball turns blue and the giant returns. This occurs with a probability of 40% (left table) or 35% (right table) when the determined color is blue. In addition, the effect number A13 is an effect that, after a dwarf appears, a dwarf returns, and then a giant appears, and the holding ball is colored and the holding ball changes to blue, and the giant returns. This occurs with a probability of 20% (left table) or 30% (right table) when the determined color is blue. Here, for staging numbers A12 and A13, a dwarf with a low expectation of holding ball change initially appears, and the color of the holding ball does not change due to the dwarf, but then a giant appears and changes the color of the holding ball We are doing up production. By preparing such a step-up effect, the player is interested in whether or not a giant with a high degree of expectation of change appears after the dwarf appears even if the color of the holding ball does not change after the appearance of the dwarf You can see it. In addition, the player can be made to be interested by the effect of increasing the jackpot expectation level in stages.

  Further, in this example, when the determined color is "red" and the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of the 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variation big hit. The effect number A21 is selected if the value of random Y is in the range of 1 to 30, the effect number A22 is selected if in the range of 31 to 50, and the effect number A23 is selected if it is the range of 51 to 90 If the range is 91 to 100, the effect number A24 is selected. On the other hand, when the determined color is “red” and the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command other than the above, if the value of random Y is in the range of 1 to 30, the effect number A21 is selected, If it is in the range of 31 to 60, the effect number A22 is selected, if it is in the range of 61 to 99, the effect number A23 is selected, and if it is 100, the A24 is selected. As for the effect number A21, after the dwarf appears, the dwarf colors the holding ball and the holding ball changes to blue, then the dwarf returns, the giant appears, and the giant colors the holding ball. It is an effect that the fill and hold ball changes to red and the giant returns. This is a step-up effect that appears with a probability of 30% (left table and right table) when the determined color is red.

  Here, for the effect of the effect number A22, a dwarf appears and performs an operation of dividing the target holding ball with a hammer, but the holding ball is not broken, the dwarf returns, and then a giant appears, The ball is colored and the holding ball turns red, and the giant returns. That is, although the color change is determined, an effect is produced as if the shape change was performed, and then an effect that causes the color change is performed. Thus, by performing rendering across a plurality of systems (super reach expectation and big hit expectation), the player can not finally grasp which system is to be rendered until the end of the rendering, Interest in In the present embodiment, except for the effect of A22, it is assumed that a dwarf or a giant with a brush first appears in all the effects (AXX) shown in FIG.

  Moreover, in this example, only a dwarf appears and the effect that the color of the holding ball changes is only A24, and the appearance rate is 10% (left table) when the determined color is "red" or It is 1% (right table). That is, when only a small person appears, the degree of expectation for the color of the holding ball to change is low, and when a giant appears, the degree of expectation for the color of the holding ball to change is high. It is However, in the effect (A24) in which only a small person appears and changes the color of the holding ball, the color of the holding ball changes to red. And, when a symbol designation command other than 2R, 10R, or 15R certainty big hit is received, distribution is performed so that the effect of A24 appears only with a very low probability of 1% when the determined color is "red". It has been done. That is, although the color of the holding ball is hardly changed by only a small person, if the color is changed, the jackpot expectation is extremely high. That is, even when a dwarf appears, the player can see the effect with interest as to whether or not the color of the holding ball changes.

  When the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect number in step S6018D, it sets a flag for "preserving notice change in progress" in step S6019E, and executes holding ball change effect execution of the table for holding ball display processing in step S6019F After setting the flag, the process ends. Here, the holding ball change effect execution flag is set for each of the display area 1 to the display area 8 as shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 described later, and in the present embodiment, the holding ball increased in S6017A or S6017B. The holding ball change presentation execution flag of the display area corresponding to is set (set to 1). In the table shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that the time required for the effect (holding ball change effect time) is also stored in association with each effect number.

(Determination of shape of holding ball)
When “shape change” is determined as a rendering system in step S6018A (N), the CPU for effect control 101 determines the shape of the holding ball after the advance notice of the holding ball change based on the random X ( Step S6019 B). As described above, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter when any start winning game command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, and the value of the extracted value is randomly X And In the present embodiment, the random X is any value from 1 to 100.

  In this embodiment, based on the distribution table at the time of shape change determination shown in FIG. 62 (b), the effect control CPU 101 determines the shape of the holding ball after passing through the advance notice announcement effect of the holding ball change (that is, after character appearance). Decide. Here, the effect control CPU 101 is a variation category command (for example, C 607 (H), C 609 (H), C 60 B (H), C 612 (H), and the like) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of super reach. When C 615 (H) is received, the table of the determination value (upper part in FIG. 62 (b)) in which the shape of the holding ball changes (breaks) with high probability is selected, and in the case of normal reach When the variation category command (for example, C610 (H), C 611 (H), C 613 (H), and C 614 (H)) to be transmitted is received, it is determined that the shape of the holding ball changes (breaks) with moderate probability Select a table of values (the middle row in (b) of Fig. 62), and receive fluctuation category commands other than the above (for example, C600 (H) etc.) The time was, the shape of the hold ball (not crack) does not change with high probability to select the judgment value table (FIG. 62 (b) bottom).

  In this example, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the variation category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of super reach, the shape of the holding ball if the value of the random X is in the range of 1 to 5 Is changed, and if it is in the range of 6 to 100, the shape of the holding ball is changed (the appearance character splits the holding ball and performs the effect of causing the letter S to appear). Therefore, the shape of the holding ball after the appearance of the character does not change with a probability of 5%, but changes (breaks) with a probability of 95%. When the effect control CPU 101 receives the variation category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of normal reach, the shape of the holding ball is changed if the value of random X is in the range of 1 to 75. And if it is in the range of 76 to 100, the shape of the retaining ball is changed. Therefore, the shape of the holding ball after the appearance of the character does not change with a probability of 75%, but changes (breaks) with a probability of 25%. Furthermore, when a variation category command other than the above is received, if the value of random X is in the range of 1 to 99, the shape of the holding ball is not changed, and if 100, the shape of the holding ball is changed. Therefore, the shape of the holding ball after the appearance of the character does not change with a probability of 99% but changes (breaks) with a probability of 1%.

  As described above, the shape of the holding ball changes with high probability when the variable category command indicating the super reach is received, and the shape of the holding ball does not change with high probability when the fluctuation category command other than the above is received. It has become. In particular, when a variation category command that does not match either super reach or normal reach is received (FIG. 62 (b) lower), the shape of the holding ball is distributed so that it changes only with a very low probability (1%) Has been done. Therefore, the player can grasp the expectation of super reach depending on whether or not the shape of the holding ball changes after the appearance of the character, and can play the game with interest.

  If the effect control CPU 101 determines the shape (not to crack or break) of the holding ball in step S6019B, whether or not the holding ball having a higher degree of expectation than the determined shape is displayed (or displayed) (Step S6019C). As described above, the effect control CPU 101 stores a table for holding ball display processing (see, for example, FIGS. 65 and 66 described later) in the RAM. The table is displayed in the display area corresponding to the display area (display area 1, display area 2,..., Display area 8 from the left of the screen) of the respective holding balls in the total hold storage display unit 18c. Sphere display mode (1st normal display, 2nd normal display, 1st special display (blue), 2nd special display (blue), 1st special display (red), 2nd special display (red), 1st special Display (S), second special display (S), dropout mode or non-display), holding ball change production showing whether or not holding ball change production has been performed for the holding ball displayed in the display area A flag and an effect number of a pending ball change effect executed or executed for the pending ball displayed in the display area are stored.

  This effect number is attached corresponding to the change in shape of the holding ball as shown in FIG. 64. In this example, the effect number B0X shows no change in shape of the hold ball (does not break) and the effect number B1X shows the change in shape It is an effect of shape change (break). Therefore, in step S6019C, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the holding sphere having a shape having a higher degree of expectation than the determined shape in step S6019B is displayed by referring to the holding ball display processing table of the RAM. be able to. For example, in the case where the determined shape is "not broken" and the effect number B1X (corresponding to the crack) is stored in the table for holding ball display processing, YES is determined in S6019C. If it is determined YES in S6019C, the process ends. As described above, when the high-predictive-prediction advance notice effect is performed, the lower-predictive pre-read advance notice effect is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered by the frequent occurrence of the pre-reading notice, and to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced by the pre-reading notice having a low degree of expectation.

(Determination of shape change production)
If the CPU 101 for effect control, in step S6019C, confirms that the holding ball having a shape having a higher degree of expectation than the determined shape is not displayed (and not displayed) (N), the effect is determined based on random Y (step S6019) S6019 D). As described above, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter when any start winning game command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, and the value of the extracted value is randomly set to Y. And In the present embodiment, the random Y is any value from 1 to 100.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect number based on the effect distribution table at the time of shape determination shown in FIG. When the variation category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in the case of the super reach, the table on the left side ("in the case of the super reach") shown in FIG. 64 is selected, and in the case of the normal reach When the variation category command transmitted from computer 560 is received, the central table (“in the case of normal reach”) shown in FIG. 64 is selected, and when the variation category command other than the above is received, the right table shown in FIG. Select (“Other than the left case”).

  In this example, when the determined shape is “not broken” and the effect control CPU 101 receives the variation category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of super reach, the value of the random Y is If it is in the range of 1 to 40, the effect number B01 is selected, if it is in the range of 41 to 80, the effect number B02 is selected, if it is in the range of 81 to 90, the effect number B03 is selected, the range of 91 to 100 If it is, the effect number B04 is selected. When the determined shape is "not broken" and the effect control CPU 101 receives the variation category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of normal reach, the value of random Y is 1 to 45. The effect number B01 is selected if it is in the range, the effect number B02 is selected if it is in the range 46 to 85, the effect number B03 is selected if it is in the range 86 to 95, and it is in the range 96 to 100 The effect number B04 is selected. Further, when a variation category command other than the above is received, if the value of random Y is in the range of 1 to 50, the effect number B01 is selected, and if it is in the range of 51 to 90, the effect number B02 is selected. If the range is 95, the effect number B03 is selected, and if the range is 96 to 100, the effect number B04 is selected. Here, the effect numbers B01 and B02 are effects that only a dwarf appears, and these are 80% (left table), 85% (middle table), or 90% (right table) when the determined shape is "not broken". Appears with a high probability of). On the other hand, effect numbers B03 and B04 are effects in which only giants appear, and these are 20% (left table), 15% (middle table), or 10% (right table) when the determined shape is "not broken". It only appears with a low probability of Therefore, when the effect of "not broken" is performed, the probability that only a small person appears is set extremely high.

  Further, in this example, when the determined shape is “split” and the effect control CPU 101 receives the variation category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of super reach, the value of random Y is If 1 is in the range of 1 to 30, the effect number B11 is selected, if it is in the range of 31 to 50, the effect number B12 is selected, if it is in the range of 51 to 90, the effect number B13 is selected. If it is a range, the effect number B14 is selected. Further, when the determined shape is "split" and the effect control CPU 101 receives the variation category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of normal reach, the value of the random Y is 1 to 40. If it is in the range, the effect number B11 is selected, if it is in the range of 41 to 70, the effect number B12 is selected, if it is in the range of 71 to 99, the effect number B13 is selected. If it is 100, the effect number B14 is selected. Do. When a variation category command other than the above is received, the effect number B11 is selected if the value of the random Y is in the range of 1 to 35, and the effect number B12 is selected if the value is in the range of 36 to 70. If it is in the range of 99, the effect number B13 is selected, and if it is 100, the effect number B14 is selected. Here, the effect number B13 is an effect in which only a giant appears, which appears with a probability of 40% (left table) or 29% (middle table and right table) when the determined shape is "split". On the other hand, for the effect number B11, after the dwarf appears, the dwarf performs a movement to divide the holding ball with a hammer but the holding ball does not break, then the dwarf returns, a giant appears, and the giant holds the holding ball. The action of dividing by a hammer is performed, the holding ball is broken, the letter S appears, and the giant returns. This occurs with a probability of 30% (left table), 40% (middle table), or 35% (right table) when the determined shape is "split". Here, for the effect number B11, a dwarf with a low degree of expectation for holding ball change initially appears, and the shape of the holding ball does not change due to the dwarf, but then a giant appears and changes the shape of the holding ball. It is carried out. By preparing such a step-up effect, the player is interested in whether or not a giant with a high degree of expectation of change will appear after the appearance of the dwarf even if the shape of the holding ball does not change after the appearance of the dwarf You can see it. In addition, the player can be made to be interested by the effect of increasing the super reach expectation level in stages.

  Here, for the effect of the effect number B12, a dwarf appears and performs an operation of painting a color on the target holding ball with a brush, but the color of the holding ball does not change, the dwarf returns, and then a giant appears Then, it is an effect that the holding ball is divided by a hammer and the giant returns. That is, although the change in shape is determined, an effect is performed as if the change in color is performed, and then an effect that causes the change in shape is performed. By thus performing rendering across a plurality of systems (big hit expectancy and super reach expectation), the player can not finally grasp which system of rendering is performed until the end of the rendering, so Interest in In the present embodiment, except for the effect of B12, it is assumed that a dwarf or a giant with a hammer first appears in all the effects (BXX) shown in FIG.

  In this example, only a dwarf appears and the effect of changing the shape of the holding ball is only B14, and the appearance rate is 10% (left table) when the determined shape is "split" or It is 1% (middle table and right table). That is, when only a small person appears, the degree of expectation that the shape of the holding ball changes is low, and when the giant appears, the effect is distributed such that the degree of expectation that the shape of the holding ball changes is high. It is However, in the effect (B14) in which only a small person appears and changes the shape of the holding ball, the holding ball is broken, and when the variation category command other than the super reach is received, the determined shape is "split". The distribution is performed so that the effect of B14 appears only with an extremely low probability of 1%. That is, although the shape of the holding ball is hardly changed by only a small person, if the shape is changed, the jackpot expectation is extremely high. That is, even when a dwarf appears, the player can see the effect with an interest as to whether or not the shape of the holding ball changes.

  When the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect number in step S6019D, it sets a flag for "preserving notice change in progress" in step S6019E, and in step S6019F, displays the corresponding display area in the table for holding ball display processing. After setting the holding ball change effect execution flag of the process, the process ends. Here, the holding ball change effect execution flag is set for each of the display area 1 to the display area 8 as shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 described later, and in the present embodiment, the holding ball increased in S6017A or S6017B. The holding ball change presentation execution flag of the display area corresponding to is set (set to 1). In the table shown in FIG. 64, the time required for the effect is also stored in association with each effect number.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the starting winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs, and in S6010, the prefetching of the effect mode of "retention ball change" Even in the case where it is determined to execute the advance presentation effect, in S6017A or S6017B, a process of temporarily increasing the first normal display or the second normal display is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 44, with the start of the next change, the advance notice of the effect mode of “hold ball change” is executed targeting the increased first normal display or second normal display.

  Next, the case where the process is shifted to B in the process shown in FIG. 38 will be described. In step S6020, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the latest start winning combination designation command stored in the start winning combination command storage area is a first start winning combination designation command. If the first start prize designation command is stored, the effect control CPU 101 increases the first normal display by one as a hold display on the total hold storage display unit 18c (step S6021).

  If the latest start prize designation command is not the first start prize designation command (that is, if the second start prize designation command is stored), the effect control CPU 101 holds the hold on the combined hold storage display unit 18c. The second normal display is incremented by one as a display (step S6022).

  Next, the case of shifting to C in the process shown in FIG. 38 will be described. If the process proceeds to step S6023, any command failure at the start winning combination or inconsistency occurs and the command at the starting winning combination can not be received normally. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the latest command stored in the start winning command storage area, and at least commands other than the start winning designation command (ie, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the total number of pending storages) It is confirmed whether or not the designated command has been received (step S6023). Specifically, the command missing in the storage area where the latest command of the start winning command storage area is stored is only the start winning designation command (the first start winning designation command or the second start winning designation command). Yes, if other symbol specification commands, variation category commands and total pending storage number specification commands are stored in order and the contents of the symbol specification commands and variation category commands are also consistent, then at least other than the start prize specification commands Since three commands (design designation command, variation category command, combined holding memory number designation command) can be received, there is a possibility that a certain degree of credibility can be secured. If there is any command other than the start winning combination designation command that can not be received, the process proceeds to step S6031.

  If it is determined that at least a command other than the start winning designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all variation category commands stored in the start winning command storage area, and extracts each variation category Based on the command, whether or not all of the variation category commands stored as the determination result at the time of winning for the start winning combination up to one before are all variation category 1 commands (command C600 (H). Designated non-reach CA2-1.) It confirms (step S6024). If all are variation category 1 commands, the process moves to step S6025. If at least one variation category command other than the variation category 1 command is included, the process proceeds to step S6031 without executing the process of steps S6025 to S6030.

  If all are the variation category 1 commands in step S6024, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the high probability state flag is set (step S6025). If the high probability state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6031. If the high probability state flag is not set, the CPU 101 for production control selects the prefetch notice distribution table C as a table for determining the presence / absence of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the advance notice effect (step S6026).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for preview advance notice effect mode determination for determining a play mode for preview advance notice effect, and based on the received variation category command, the value of the extracted random number for preview action notice mode determination By determining which judgment value is included in the pre-read advance notice distribution table selected in step S6026, it is determined whether or not the pre-read advance notice effect is to be performed and an effect mode (step S6027).

  In step S6027, the effect control CPU 101 uses the pre-read advance distribution table C at the time of command non-normal reception shown in FIG. 41C selected in step S6026 to select the variation pattern type indicated by the received variation category command. Based on the determination result at the time of winning, an effect form of the advance notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the prefetch notice distribution table C, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a change pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1 by a change category command (that is, a specific effect such as reach is also a pseudo sequence). 41C only when the result at the time of winning determination indicating that “non-reach will be lost” not accompanied is also shown (specifically, when command C 600 (H) is received). As shown in the figure, it is decided to carry out the advance notice of the change of the change pattern at the time of the symbol change or the mode transition, and the “normal reach out”, the “normal reach big hit”, the “super reach” In the case of "reach out of reach" or "super reach big hit", no advance notice effect is executed. That is, in this embodiment, if any of the start winning command can not be received normally, "change in variation pattern at symbol variation" which can be executed even in "non reach out" or Only the pre-read advance notice effect (a so-called pre-read advance notice effect) of the effect mode of “mode transition” can be executed, and the execution frequency of the pre-read advance notice effect is prevented from being lowered more than necessary. In addition, it does not execute only in the case of "non-reach out", for example, "previous notice effect at a low rate in the case of" normal reach out "," normal reach big hit "," super reach out "and" super reach big hit " It may be possible to allocate the advance notice distribution table C so as to be executable. If so, it is not necessarily determined that "non-reach is lost" when "previous notice effect of the change of the change pattern at the time of symbol change" or "mode transition" is executed. can do.

  In this embodiment, even if any start winning combination command can not be received normally, if a command other than the start winning combination designation command is received, only the so-called advance notice effect of Gasseed Although the case where it is configured to be executable is shown, the processes of steps S6023 to S6030 are not executed, and when any command at the start winning combination can not be received normally, the setting and execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is performed It may be configured not to perform at all. In particular, the fact that any one of the start winning combination commands (design designation command, variation category command, start winning designation command, total pending storage number designation command) could not be received normally is designated by the command. Since it is considered that the credibility of the information is low, it is most desirable not to execute the pre-read advance notice effect of all the production modes in the pre-read notice setting limited period (the process of steps S8006 to S8014 described later is not performed either) Is desirable).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute pre-reading advance notice effect (step S6028). For example, when it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is not performed because there is no distribution in the pre-reading advance distribution table C, the process proceeds to step S6031.

  If it is determined to execute the prefetch advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetch notice in progress flag indicating that the execution of the advance notice effect has been decided according to the effect mode decided in step S6027. (Step S6029).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the current total number of pending storages in the change number counter (step S6030). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total number of pending storage numbers designated by the latest total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning winning command storage area in the variation frequency counter. Then, the process proceeds to step S6032.

  In step S6031, the effect control CPU 101 sets undecided information in the storage area of the latest command in the start winning command storage area (step S6031). Specifically, in FIG. 36, the value of the undecided information in the storage area storing the latest command is set to "1".

  In step S6032, the effect control CPU 101 makes all the pending displays displayed in the total pending storage display unit 18c different from any of the first normal display, the second normal display, the first special display, and the second special display. While changing to the dropping mode, the pending display of the dropping mode is increased by one. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 changes all the suspension displays displayed on the total suspension storage display unit 18c to a green suspension ball and increases the green suspension ball by one. In addition, the suspension display of the dropout mode is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and for example, the suspension display may be changed to a color other than green (for example, yellow), and the shape of the suspension display is changed. (For example, the hold display may be changed to a triangle display or the like).

  In this embodiment, the case is shown where all pending display items displayed on the combined pending storage display unit 18c are changed when a command failure or inconsistency at the start winning combination occurs. To display only the hold display for the pending storage in which a drop or inconsistency occurred, in the drop mode, the first normal display, the second normal display, the first special display, the second special display for the previous hold display You may make it continue. In addition, after the dropout or inconsistency of the command occurs, the pending display may be displayed in a dropout mode for the pending storage that has occurred further during the prefetching notice setting limitation period, or the normal first normal display And may be displayed in the second normal display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the prefetch notice setting restriction flag (step S6033), and starts the prefetch notice setting restriction period.

  In this embodiment, when the previewing notice effect other than "hold ball change" is already being executed (Y in step S6002), the process proceeds to step S6020, and the commands in step S6004 and subsequent steps are missed Although the case where the determination of inconsistency is not performed is shown, even during the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect other than “hold ball change”, the same processing as steps S6004 to S6006 is executed and the command is missed or inconsistent. If it is determined that a command has been missed or inconsistent, the same processing as step S6033 is executed to set the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag, and the prefetching advance notice setting restriction A period may be started. Further, the same processing as step S6032 may be executed to change all the pending displays displayed on the total pending storage display unit 18c to the missed state.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted also at the time of power failure recovery (see step S44), but as shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, it is normal time Since, based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command is received, it moves to the production design fluctuation start processing and starts the fluctuation indication of the production design, the fluctuation of the production design only by receiving the display result specification command without receiving the fluctuation pattern command The display does not start.

  FIGS. 43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the pre-reading advance notice setting restriction flag is set (step S8000). If the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the prefetching notice setting restriction period), the process shifts to step S8015.

  If the prefetch advance notice setting restriction flag is set (that is, if it is in the advance notice notice setting restriction period), the effect control CPU 101 stores the contents of the start winning prize command stored in the start winning prize command storage area. It confirms (step S8001). Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether all the storage areas 1 to 8 in which the command for starting winning is stored is in the storing state in which all the commands for starting winning are received in order. (Step S8002).

  Specifically, in this embodiment, four commands of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start prize designation command and a total pending storage number designation command are batched into one timer interrupt as a command at the start prize. If the command is stored in all the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, the MODE data is “C4 (H)” and “C6 (H)” respectively. It is supposed that the commands “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) and “C2 (H)” should be stored (see FIG. 14). Therefore, if any one of these MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 still has a storage area in which the storage state in which a command is dropped due to noise or data corruption of the MODE data remains. It can be determined that the storage area of the storage state where the command could not be received correctly still remains.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning combination designation command, and the total number of pending storage number designation commands are to be received in this order, In 8, if the command is stored, the MODE data is "C4 (H)", "C6 (H)", "C0 (H)" (or "C1 (H)"), and "C2 (H)" It should be stored in the order of Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 stores "C6 (H)" before "C4 (H)" if the order is different even if all the MODE data is stored (for example, "C6 (H)" is stored). (For example), it can be determined that the storage area of the storage state where the command could not be received correctly due to noise or data corruption of MODE data still remains.

  If the received start winning combination commands are not in order or the storage area of the storage state determined to be partially missing is still present, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. When it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in the storage state in which all the commands at the start winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 is stored in the start winning command storage area. In all the storage areas 1 to 8, it is checked whether the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent (step S8003). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a gap is stored as a symbol designation command, a variation category 1 command to a variation category 12 command corresponding to a variation as a variation category command One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 15 and 16). Nevertheless, if a variation category 21 command to a variation category 29 command (see FIG. 17) corresponding to a big hit or sudden definite variation big hit and a small hit are stored, the effect control CPU 101 performs a symbol designation command and variation It can be determined that the content of the category command is not consistent and there is still a storage area storage area with a conflict.

  If it is determined that the storage area of the storage state in which the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are not consistent still remains, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. If it is determined that the storage state is such that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent in all of the storage areas 1 to 8, the effect control CPU 101 stores the start prize winning command storage area. In all of the storage areas 1 to 8, it is checked whether the contents of the start winning combination designation command and the total hold storage number designation command are consistent (step S8004). Specifically, a first start winning designation command designating that there has been a start winning for the first start winning opening 13 and a second starting winning for designating that there has been a start winning for the second start winning opening 14 If the combined hold storage number indicated by the EXT data of the combined hold storage number specification command stored in the start winning winning command storage area is 0 although the specified command is stored, effect control The CPU 101 can determine that the contents of the start winning combination designation command and the total hold storage number designation command are not consistent and storage areas of storage states having contradiction still remain.

  If it is determined that the storage area of the storage state in which the contents of the start winning combination designation command and the combined hold storage number designation command are not consistent still remains, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. When it is determined that the storage state is such that the contents of the start winning combination designation command and the total number of pending storage number designation commands are consistent in all the storage areas 1 to 8, the effect control CPU 101 limits pre-reading notice setting The flag is reset (step S8005). That is, since all the storage areas 1 to 8 of the command storage area for start winning are in the storage state in which the command for start winning is normally received, It is determined that the pending storage in which a dropout or inconsistency has occurred has been digested, the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is reset, and the prefetching notice setting restriction period is ended.

  In this embodiment, the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is reset at the timing when variation display is started when the pending storage where the command is missed or inconsistent is digested, and the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period is set. Although the case where it ends is shown, it does not come to such timing, for example, it ends pre-reading notice setting restriction period at the timing which ends the fluctuation indication when the retention memory where the failure of the command and the inconsistency arose is digested You may do it. In this case, for example, processing similar to steps S 8000 to S 8005 may be performed in effect symbol fluctuation stop processing to be described later, the prefetch advance notice setting restriction flag may be reset, and the prefetch advance notice setting restriction period may be ended.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether there is any of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area which has the value of the undetermined information set to “1” (step S8006) ). If the value of the unjudged information is set to "1" (that is, if there is a pending storage effect that occurred during the pre-read advance notice setting restriction period if the pre-read advance notice effect setting process has not been executed) , And proceeds to step S8007. If the value of the undetermined information is not set to “1”, the process proceeds to step S8015.

  In this embodiment, when there are a plurality of storage areas in which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1” in the start winning command storage area, the most recently stored pending storage (the first The processing of steps S8007 to S8013 is performed on the command at the time of the start winning for the last storage for the start winning combination), and the setting processing of the advance notice for the pending storage occurring during the read advance notice setting limited period Shall be retroactive. Note that the processing of steps S8007 to S8013 is performed on all the commands stored in the plurality of storage areas in which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1”, and those which can set the advance announcement notice effect retroactively It may be determined whether there is any.

  If the value of the undecided information is set to “1”, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all variation category commands from the storage area where the command is stored before the undecided storage area. Then, based on each of the extracted variation category commands, all variation category commands stored as a result of the winning determination with respect to the start winning combination up to one before the undecided storage area are variation category 1 commands (command C600 (H). It is confirmed whether it is non-reach CA2-1 designation.) (Step S8007). If all are variation category 1 commands, the process moves to step S8008. If at least one variation category command other than the variation category 1 command is included, the process proceeds to step S8014 without executing the process of steps S8008 to S8013.

  If all are the variation category 1 commands in step S8007, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S8008). If the high probability state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8014. If the high probability state flag is not set, the CPU 101 for production control selects the prefetch notice distribution table D as a table for determining the presence / absence of prefetch notice effect and the effect mode of prefetch notice effect (step S8009).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for preview advance notice effect mode determination for determining a play mode for preview advance notice effect, and based on the received variation category command, the value of the extracted random number for preview action notice mode determination By determining which judgment value is included in the pre-read advance notice distribution table selected in step S8009, it is determined whether or not the pre-read advance notice effect is to be performed and the effect mode (step S8010).

  In step S8010, the effect control CPU 101 uses the prefetch notice distribution table D at the time of canceling the prefetch notice setting restriction shown in FIG. 41D selected in step S8009, and indicates the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the received fluctuation category command. Based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect mode of the previewed advance effect is determined. In this embodiment, in the case of using the prefetch notice distribution table D, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a change pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1 by a change category command (that is, a specific effect such as reach is also pseudo continuous). If the result at the time of winning determination indicates that "non-reach will be lost" not shown) (specifically, when the command C600 (H) is received), or the variation category command "normal reach" If the result at the time of winning showing that it is "off" is shown, it indicates that it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA3-1 or normal CA3-2 by fluctuation category command (that is, it becomes "normal reach big hit") When the winning determination result is indicated (specifically, command C610 (H), command C 611 (H), Command C 613 (H), or when receiving command C 614 (H), at the time of winning that indicates that it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 in the variation category command (that is, "super reach is lost") When the determination result is indicated (specifically, when the command C 607 (H) is received), the variation category command becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 (that is, "super reach big hit" (D) when the determination result at the time of winning showing that it is shown (specifically, when the command C 612 (H) or the command C 615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. It is decided to execute the advance notice of the effect of "a change in change pattern at the time of symbol change" or "mode transition".

  In addition, for example, with regard to pre-read notice effect of the effect mode of “change in holding ball”, if it is executed retroactively with respect to undecided hold storage at the time of cancellation of the pre-read notice setting limit period, The hold display already displayed as the first normal display or the second normal display will be changed to the first special display or the second special display in the middle, and an unnatural hold display will be executed. Become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), in this embodiment, the prefetch notice distribution table D at the time of canceling the prefetch notice setting restriction is allocated to the prefetch notice effect of the effect mode of "change in holding ball". Is not performed, and it is made not to retroactively execute the pre-reading advance notice effect of the effect mode of "the holding ball change".

  In addition, for example, with regard to the advance notice notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode, it is a advance play effect in which the countdown is continued in a continuous manner over a plurality of variable displays, In contrast to this, if it is executed retroactively, an unnatural effect such as the countdown starting from the variable display on the way will be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice distribution table D at the time of releasing the pre-reading notice setting restriction is allocated for the pre-reading notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode. It is made not to carry out pre-reading advance notice production of a production mode of "countdown" retroactively. That is, regarding the previewed advance notice effect of the continuous effect mode, in order to prevent the effect from becoming unnatural, it is not performed retroactively at the time of cancellation of the prefetched notice setting limited period. In this embodiment, the “continuous effect” executed in a continuous manner across a plurality of variable displays corresponds to the advance notice of the “countdown” effect.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute preview advance notice effect (step S8011). For example, when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect because the pre-reading pre-notice distribution table D is not distributed, the process proceeds to step S8014.

  If it is determined to execute the preview advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetch notice in progress flag indicating that the execution of the advance notice effect is determined according to the effect mode determined in step S8010. (Step S8012).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 receives a set of commands for starting winning at the time of the start winning winning command storage area received prior to the command targeted for the judgment of pre-reading advance notice effect and stored in the starting winning command storage area (design designation command, variation category command , Specify the number of start winning combination designation command and total pending storage number specification command), and set the specified number (that is, the number of fluctuation displays up to one before the fluctuation display of the notice target) in the fluctuation number counter (Step S8013).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the undecided information of all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning game time command storage area to “0” (step S8014).

  In this embodiment, a case has been described in which the prefetch notice effect is set and executed retroactively with respect to the undecided pending storage at the time of canceling the prefetch notice setting limited period, but the prefetch notice setting limited period is canceled Even if that is done, it may be configured not to set up and execute the advance notice announcement effect retroactively to the undecided pending storage. In this case, specifically, after the process of step S8005 is performed, the process may directly proceed to step S8015, and the processes of steps S8006 to S8014 may not be performed. Further, in this case, it is not necessary to provide storage areas for setting undetermined information in the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning combination command storage area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads out the fluctuation pattern command from the fluctuation pattern command storage area (step S8015). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8015 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8016). That is, when the process of step S8016 is executed by the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the fluctuation display of the identification information (stop of the display pattern according to the fluctuation display pattern (the fluctuation pattern) determined by the fluctuation display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU101 for production control is the chance eye design (for example, "223" and "445" etc.) as temporary stop symbol of pseudo run in step S8016. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. In addition, when it is decided in step S8016 that the CPU 101 for production control performs continuous rendering of the rendering mode of "change in variation pattern at symbol variation", the so-called chance eye symbol as a stop symbol of the rendering symbol (For example, a combination of a jackpot symbol and a symbol whose one symbol deviates, such as "223" or "445", which is not a reach) is determined. Note that the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8016, the CPU for effect control 101 may determine whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect design based only on the fluctuation pattern command. .

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 45, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” (the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation Command, display result 3 designation command or display result 4 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. In addition, the determination ratio of the stop symbol may be made different depending on whether it is “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. For example, in the case of "15R positive variation big hit", the ratio to determine the combination of the production symbols that the three designs are aligned with the same odd symbol is high, and in the case of "10R positive variation big hit" The ratio of determining the combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same even symbols may be increased.

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 5 specification command or the display result 6 specification command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data representing a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the table for holding ball display processing to check whether the holding ball change effect execution flag corresponding to any display area is set (step S8017A). If the holding ball change effect execution flag corresponding to any display area is not set (N), the advance reading notice effect of the effect mode of “hold ball change” is not set as the effect mode of the notice effect at step S8017D described later . In addition, when a plurality of holding ball change effect execution flags are set, it is assumed that the holding ball change effect is executed first from the one that has been set first (that is, the priority is displayed in the display areas 1 and 2) , 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 in order).

  On the other hand, when the holding ball change effect execution flag corresponding to any display area is set in step S8017A (Y), in step S8017B, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the holding ball display processing table and Whether the time required for the effect is less than the fluctuation time recognized based on the fluctuation pattern command or not, specifying the effect number corresponding to the display area (the display area in which the holding ball change effect execution flag is set) Confirm. If it is determined in step S8017B that the time required for effect (hold ball change effect time) is less than the fluctuation time (Y), then in step S8017D described later, the effect mode of "hold ball change" as the effect mode of advance effect effect Set preview advance notice effect.

  Here, when it is determined in step S8017B that the time required for effect (hold ball change effect time) is equal to or longer than the change time (N), processing for carrying over the hold ball change effect to the next change is performed in step S8017C. . In the present embodiment, in step S8017D to be described later, it is configured not to set the advance notice notice effect of the effect mode of “hold ball change” as the effect mode of the notice effect. Furthermore, in S8317 to be described later, the flag for holding ball change effect execution is not reset and remains set.

  In step S8017D, the CPU for effect control 101 causes the notice display on the effect display device 9 while the fluctuation of the indication pattern is displayed (notice effect other than advance notice effect. For example, step-up notice effect, mini character notice effect, movable object notice effect, effect ) Is executed, and an advance notice effect setting process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the execution of the effect of the blade role thing. Further, as described above, when it is determined in step S8017B that the time required for effect (hold ball change effect time) is less than the fluctuation time (Y), the effect mode of "hold ball change" as the effect mode of advance effect effect Set preview advance notice effect.

  Next, when executing the variation pattern and the advance notice effect and other advance notice effects, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the advance notice effect and other advance effects (step S8018). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8019).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. indicating the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variation display time (variation time) of the variation display of the production symbol is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 46 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  The effect control CPU 101 is determined to execute pre-reading notice effects and other pre-notice effects, and the pre-reading notice running flag and other notice execution flags (for example, holding ball change effect execution flag) are set. If it is present, in step S8018, a process table corresponding to the preview advance notice effect or other notice effect is selected. Here, when pre-reading advance notice production of the production mode of "the holding ball change" is set in step S8017D, the process table corresponding to the pre-reading notice production of the production mode of "the holding ball change" is selected in S8018, and step S8017D In the case where the advance notice notification of the effect mode of the "hold ball change" is not set, the process table corresponding to the advance notice effect of the effect mode of the "hold ball change" is not selected in S8018.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effects display device 9 as effect parts, effect elements as effect parts Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8020). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70. In addition, for example, when performing pseudo rendition effects or advance notice effects, effects that move the movable member 78 by driving the motor 86, or move the effect vanes members 79a and 79b by driving the motor 87. Is done.

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls to perform the fluctuation display of the effect pattern by the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8021). Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the start winning winning command (design designation command, variation category command, starting winning winning designation command, and the like) stored in the first storage area (storage area 1) of the start winning command storage area. The accumulated holding storage number designation command is deleted, and the content of the start winning command storage area is shifted (step S8022).

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that the advance notice advance rendition can be resumed from the next change display after the change display which has caused the dropout or inconsistency of the command and caused the read back notice setting restriction period to be digested. Although shown, for example, the shift process in step S8022 is executed after it is determined as Y in step S811 of the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, and a drop in or an inconsistency of the command occurs to cause the prefetch notice setting restriction period and It may be configured to be able to resume the pre-reading advance notice effect from the changed display. In this case, for example, on the condition that the variable display causing the prefetching notice setting limitation period is “non-reach out” due to dropout or inconsistency of the command, it causes the prefetching notice setting limitation period. The preview advance notice effect may be executable in the variable display.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802) (step S8023).

  FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing a process during production design fluctuation (step S802) in the production control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts one from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105). In addition, for example, when performing pseudo rendition effects or advance notice effects, effects that move the movable member 78 by driving the motor 86, or move the effect vanes members 79a and 79b by driving the motor 87. Is done.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not any pre-reading advance notification executing flag is set (step S8106). If any pre-reading advance notice executing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 changes the change mode at the time of symbol change according to the effect mode determined in the pre-read advance notice effect mode determination process of steps S6010, S6027, and S8010. Control to execute preview advance notice effects in any of the effect modes of “mode transition”, “countdown”, or “hold ball change” (step S8108). However, even if the flag for "preserving preview change" for "hold ball change" is set, it is confirmed that the hold ball change effect execution flag is not set in step S8017A (N), or step S8017C When the processing to carry over the holding ball change presentation to the next change is performed in step S8017D, the advance announcement notice effect of the effect mode of the “holding ball change” is not set, and the read ahead of the effect mode of the “holding ball change” in S8018 Since the process table corresponding to the preview effect is not selected, the advance preview effect is not executed in the effect mode of “change in holding ball”. In addition, when it is decided to perform pre-reading advance notice production (however, pre-reading notice production of the production mode other than "hold ball change"), specifically, after the fluctuation start of the production design, the time set in advance At the timing when has passed, preview advance notice effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode. On the other hand, when it is decided to carry out the advance notice of the presentation mode of the effect mode of the "hold ball change", specifically, the advance notice of the advance effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode at the timing immediately after the start of fluctuation of the effect pattern. Shall be Further, in the case of executing pre-reading advance notice effect, it is determined as Y in step S8106 at the timing of executing the pre-reading advance effect, and the process of step S8108 is executed. Then, it is repeatedly determined as Y in step S8106 until the pre-reading advance notice effect ends, and the process of step S8108 is executed.

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8112).

  FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing, first, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the big hit symbol has been displayed in a stopped state but fanfare production has not yet been performed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (discard symbol, big hit symbol) (step S8302). When neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control shifts to step S8311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. Check whether the big hit start designated command reception flag indicating that it is received or the small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designated command received flag which indicates that the small hit / suddenly sudden change big hit start specified command is received (step S8305) . When the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designated command reception flag is set, CPU101 for production control resets the stop design indicatory flag (step S8306), according to fanfare production A process table is selected (step S8307). If the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designation command received flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number According to data 1 and movable member control data 1), the effect device (effect display device 9 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, speakers 27 as effect component, and movable member 78 as effect component and effect Control of the blade combination members 79a, 79b) is executed (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  If it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made (N in step S8303), the CPU for effect control 101 executes the pre-read advance notice of “preserving change of ball” flag (if any). It is determined whether or not the middle flag is set (step S8311). If it is set, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter (step S8312). Further, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S8313). Then, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 resets the pre-reading notice execution flag being set (except for the pre-reading notice execution flag of “hold ball change”). (Step S8316). By performing such a process, in this embodiment, the previewing notice effect (rendering mode other than “hold ball change”) is displayed up to the immediately preceding fluctuation display when the fluctuation targeted for the winning determination is started. Pre-read advance notice effect) is executed, and the flag under pre-reading advance notice being executed is reset at the start of the variable display targeted for the prize determination (while the variable display is the target of the prize determination) There is no production). The preview advance notice effect may be executed even during the variable display subjected to the winning determination.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8317). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation specification command reception flag and the second symbol variation specification command reception flag. Note that the effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process processing or the fourth symbol process processing (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 42, the fluctuation pattern) If the command reception flag is confirmed, the variation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately). However, for example, since the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both of the effect control process processing and the fourth symbol process processing, as shown in this embodiment, at the time of the end of variation, etc. It is desirable to reset at the time of, or at the time of the big hit end, in the big hit end effect processing. When the effect control CPU 101 performs control to execute the advance notice effect in the effect mode of "hold ball change" in step S8108, the corresponding hold ball change effect execution flag is set in the hold ball display processing table. Reset (set to 0). Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8318).

(Table for holding ball display process)
As described above, the effect control CPU 101 stores the holding ball display processing table in the RAM. As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the table for holding ball display processing, the display areas of the respective holding balls in the total holding storage display unit 18c (display area 1, display area 2,..., Display area from the left of the screen) The display mode of the holding ball displayed in the display area corresponding to 8) (first normal display, second normal display, first special display (blue), second special display (blue), first special Display (red), second special display (red), first special display (S), second special display (S), dropout mode or non-display), holding sphere displayed in the display area A holding ball change effect flag indicating whether or not the holding ball change effect is executed, and an area in which the effect number of the holding ball change effect performed or executed for the holding ball displayed in the display area is stored It is done. Here, when the white holding ball is displayed in the display area, the effect control CPU 101 sets the display mode corresponding to the display area as the “first normal display”, and the gray holding ball is displayed in the display area. When the display mode corresponding to the display area is "second normal display", and when the blue holding sphere is displayed in the display area, the display mode corresponding to the display area is "first special display ( Blue) ”or“ second special display (blue) ”, and when a red holding ball is displayed in the display area, the display mode corresponding to the display area is“ first special display (red) ”or“ first 2 Special display (red) ”, and when a pictogram of S is displayed in the display area, the display mode corresponding to the display area is“ first special display (S) ”or“ second special display (S) ” And when the green holding ball is displayed in the display area, the display area A display mode corresponding to the "omission embodiment", when not in the hold display in the display area to a display mode corresponding to the display region and the "hidden".

  FIG. 65 (a) shows an example of a holding ball display processing table in the case where the total number of holding memories is 3 during the fluctuation of the effect pattern. In this state, "first normal display" is stored as a display mode of the display areas 1 to 3. Therefore, the white holding balls are displayed in all the display areas 1 to 3. Further, the effect numbers corresponding to these display areas 1 to 3 are all "000 (no effect)", and the advance notice effect of "hold ball change" is not performed. Therefore, the flag of "preserving notice change in holding ball change" is being reset (set to 0).

  It is assumed that a start winning for the first start winning opening 13 has occurred in this state. Further, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 101 has decided to perform the advance notice announcement effect of the mode of “change in holding ball” in S6010 in accordance with the start winning. At this time, the effect control CPU 101 increases the first normal display in step S6017A. That is, the white holding ball is displayed in the fourth display area. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the effect control CPU 101 sets the display mode corresponding to the fourth display area as the "first normal display" in the holding ball display processing table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the shape change in step S6018A, determines the shape (breaks) in step 6019B, and determines to execute the effect number B14 in step S6019D. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect number corresponding to the fourth display area to "B14" in the table for holding ball display processing, and the fourth display in step S6019F. A holding ball change effect execution flag corresponding to the area is set (set to 1).

  When the change being executed at the time of the start winning combination is stopped, since the control to execute the advance notice effect is not performed in the effect mode of “hold ball change” in step S8108, the hold ball change effect execution flag is It remains set. Next, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the total holding storage number subtraction designation command associated with the start of a new change, the production control CPU 101 erases the first holding display in the total holding storage display unit 18c, and the remaining holding display 1 Shift one by one (step S 662 A). Accordingly, the effect control CPU 101 sets the contents of the storage area corresponding to the display area 1 of the table for holding ball display processing ("display mode", "hold ball change effect execution flag", and "effect number"). Delete and shift the contents of the storage area corresponding to display area 2 and thereafter. That is, the data of the display area 2 is shifted to the data of the display area 1, the data of the display area 3 is shifted to the data of the display area 2, ..., the data of the display area 8 is shifted to the data of the display area 7 In the display area 8, the display mode is "not displayed", the holding ball change effect execution flag is "0 (reset state)", and the effect number is "000 (no effect)".

  By this process, as shown in FIGS. 65B and 65C, the contents of the storage area corresponding to the display area 4 are shifted to the storage area of the display area 3. In addition, it is confirmed that the holding ball change effect execution flag is set in step S8017A (in this example, it is set in the display area 3 as shown in FIG. 65C) (Y), and the holding ball change effect is On the condition that time <variation time, control to execute the effect of effect number B14 is performed in step S8108. The effect of effect number B14 is the effect of breaking the holding ball, and as shown in FIG. 54 described later, a dwarf appears and divides the holding ball by a hammer and returns (see FIGS. 54 (5) to (7)). It is a thing. When the holding ball is broken, the pictograph of S appears from the holding ball, and thereafter this is displayed as a hold. The effect control CPU 101 resets the holding ball change effect execution flag corresponding to the display area 3 in step S8317 in response to the effect of effect number B14 being executed in step S8108 in the process at the time of the variable stop. The display mode corresponding to the display area 3 is referred to as "first special display (S)" (FIG. 65 (c)).

  Next, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the total holding storage number subtraction designation command associated with the start of a new change, the production control CPU 101 erases the first holding display in the total holding storage display unit 18c, and the remaining holding display 1 Shift one by one (step S 662 A). Along with this, the effect control CPU 101 deletes the contents of the storage area corresponding to the display area 1 of the table for holding ball display processing, and shifts the contents of the storage area corresponding to the display area 2 and thereafter (FIG. d)). In addition, when a valid value (a value other than 000 in this example) is stored as an effect number corresponding to one of the display areas 1 to 8, the flag of the advance notice of holding ball change is set. It is in a state of being

  FIG. 66 (a) shows an example of a holding ball display processing table in a case where the total number of holding memories is 2 while the effect pattern is changing. In this state, “first normal display” is stored as a display mode of the display area 1, and a white holding ball is displayed in the display area 1. The effect number corresponding to the display area 1 is "000 (no effect)". In addition, “first special display (S)” is stored as a display mode of the display area 2, and a pictogram of S is displayed in the display area 2. The holding ball change effect execution flag of the display area 2 is reset (0), and B14 which is a valid value as the effect number is stored. Therefore, the flag under the pre-read advance notice of the holding ball change is in the set state (1).

  It is assumed that a start winning for the first start winning opening 13 has occurred in this state. Further, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 101 has decided to perform the advance notice announcement effect of the mode of “change in holding ball” in S6010 in accordance with the start winning. Here, the CPU for effect control 101 performs pre-reading advance notice effect of the mode of "change in holding ball" in S6010 even when the pre-reading informing execution flag of the holding ball change is set in S6002 (N) Can be determined. Therefore, even if the first special display or the second special display has a hold display, it is possible to perform the advance notice of the "hold ball change" mode accompanying the new start winning combination. When the effect control CPU 101 determines in S6010 to perform preview advance notice effect of the “holding ball change” mode, it increases the first normal display in step S6017A. That is, the white holding ball is displayed in the third display area. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the effect control CPU 101 sets the display mode corresponding to the third display area to the “first normal display” in the table for holding ball display processing. Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the color change in step S6018A, determines the color (red) in step 6018B, and determines to execute the effect number A24 in step S6018D. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect number corresponding to the third display area to "A24" in the table for holding ball display processing, and the third display in step S6019F. A holding ball change effect execution flag corresponding to the area is set (set to 1).

  When the change being executed at the time of the start winning combination is stopped, since the control to execute the advance notice effect is not performed in the effect mode of “hold ball change” in step S8108, the hold ball change effect execution flag is It remains set. Next, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the total holding storage number subtraction designation command associated with the start of a new change, the production control CPU 101 erases the first holding display in the total holding storage display unit 18c, and the remaining holding display 1 Shift one by one (step S 662 A). Accordingly, the effect control CPU 101 sets the contents of the storage area corresponding to the display area 1 of the table for holding ball display processing ("display mode", "hold ball change effect execution flag", and "effect number"). Delete and shift the contents of the storage area corresponding to display area 2 and thereafter. That is, the data of the display area 2 is shifted to the data of the display area 1, the data of the display area 3 is shifted to the data of the display area 2, ..., the data of the display area 8 is shifted to the data of the display area 7 In the display area 8, the display mode is "not displayed", the holding ball change effect execution flag is "0 (reset state)", and the effect number is "000 (no effect)".

  By this process, as shown in FIGS. 66B and 66C, the contents of the storage area corresponding to the display area 3 are shifted to the storage area of the display area 2. In addition, it is confirmed that the holding ball change effect execution flag is set in step S8017A (in this example, it is set in the display area 2 as shown in FIG. 66C) (Y), and the holding ball change effect is On the condition that time <variation time, control to execute the effect of effect number A24 is performed in step S8108. The effect of the effect number B14 is an effect of painting the color of the holding ball, and as shown in FIG. 60, a dwarf appears, and the brush is used to paint the color (red) on the holding ball and return. From then on, the red holding ball will be on hold. The effect control CPU 101 resets the holding ball change effect execution flag corresponding to the display area 2 in step S8317 in response to the effect of effect number A24 being executed in step S8108 in the process at the time of variation stop, and the display The display mode corresponding to the area 2 is set to "first special display (red)" (FIG. 66 (c)). At this time, the display mode of the display area 1 is the first special display (S), and the display mode of the display area 2 is the first special display (red). As described above, it is also possible to change the modes of the plurality of holding balls by different effect systems.

  If the shape change is determined in step S6018A (N) and the shape is not determined as the shape in step S6018B in the start winning combination described above, the effect number of B14 ("dividable" effect) is already suspended Since it is stored in the ball display processing table, YES is determined in step S6019C, and the effect (B0X) that the holding ball is not broken is not performed.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the big winning opening open flag indicating that the big winning opening opening designation command has been received is set (step S1901). When the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1902), and the effect device (effect display according to the contents of the process data n The control of the device 9, the speaker 27, the LEDs 25, 28, etc. is executed (step S1903). For example, the big hit display symbol is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the effect of displaying a character or a character indicating that the big hit has occurred is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S1905). That is, it switches to the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data) set next in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (Y in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 resets the special winning opening open flag (step S1907), and selects process data according to the effect during the round (Step S1908). Then, the process timer is started (step S1909), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the process during round (step S805) (step S1910).

  In addition, the process process for the small hit display is provided separately from the process process for the big hit display, and in the case of the small hit, for example, for a predetermined period (the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds) Sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be used to produce the same effect as in the sudden big hit.

  In addition, when it is a small hit or sudden definite strange big hit, instead of executing the production based on reception of a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designated command, the CPU 101 for production control, for example, for small hit / sudden definite strange big hit On the basis of the reception of the fluctuation pattern command of, the effect may be executed for a predetermined period to suggest that it is a small hit or a sudden positive change big hit. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 switches, for each process time, process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden probability variation big hit, and performs an effect according to the switched process data.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts one from the effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step S 880). Then, it is checked whether or not the effect period measurement timer after subtraction has timed out (step S881). Note that the effect period measurement timer is set based on, for example, confirmation of reception of the ending command in the process during the round (see step S805).

  If the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S881), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S882). Further, the effect control CPU 101 follows the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1) the effect device (effect display device 9 as a effect component) Control of various lamps as presentation parts, speakers 27 as presentation parts, movable members 78 as presentation parts, and presentation blade members 79a and 79b) is executed (step S883). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character or the like is performed.

  Next, if the process timer has not timed out (N in step S884), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step S884), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S885). Further, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer (step S886).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S881), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S888). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation specification command reception flag and a second symbol variation specification command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S889).

  Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the previewed advance effect is described. FIG. 51 to FIG. 54 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the effect mode of preview advance notice effect. Among these, FIG. 51 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the advance notice of the "notice of change in change pattern at symbol change". Moreover, FIG. 52 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the advance notice of “mode shift”. Further, FIG. 53 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the advance notice of “countdown”. Further, FIG. 54 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the advance notice of the “display ball change”. In FIGS. 51 to 54, the modes of the effect screen transition in the order of (1) (2) (3). Furthermore, in the example shown in FIGS. 51 to 54, the winning determination for the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is performed, and the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. Pre-reading advance notice effect when doing is shown when it does, but when it is prized vis-a-vis the start winning a prize to 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 14 decision is done, fluctuation of the production design synchronously with fluctuation indication of 2nd special symbol Also in the case of performing preview advance notice effect while executing display, the advance notice effect is executed in the same effect mode.

  First, with reference to FIG. 51, a specific example of the effect mode of the advance notice of the “notice of change in pattern change” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 51, first, as shown in FIG. 51 (2), when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is being executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 51 (1). It is assumed that the first start winning opening 13 has a start winning. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize effect process based on the fact that there is a new start winning (see step S 1217). Then, a prize determination result specification command (symbol designation command, variation category command) according to the prize determination result is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Further, within the same interrupt, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a first start winning combination designation command and a total holding number-of-retentions storage number designation command as suspension storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221), and the microcomputer 100 for effect control As shown in FIG. 51 (2), the pending display in the combined pending storage display unit 18c is performed (in this example, the first normal display) on the basis of the received first start winning specifying command and the combined pending storage number specifying command. Is increased by 1 (see step S6021). In this case, based on the fact that the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the prize determination result specification command, the microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the advance notice advance effect and, as the effect mode of the advance advance notice effect, Is determined (see step S800A). Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time is over and the disappointing symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 51 (1) and (2), during the variable display of the effect symbols, the variable display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 51 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 1 by 1 (see step S662A), and start variable display of the next rendering pattern. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the chance symbol as the stop symbol of the effect pattern based on the fact that "change in change pattern at symbol change" is determined as the effect mode of the advance notice effect. . Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (5), the fluctuation time is over and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, also in the case shown in FIG. 51 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the rendering symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 51 (5), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result specification command, and the total storage reserve memory number subtraction specification command, and as shown in FIG. 51 (6), the suspension display on the total storage storage display unit 18c. 1 by 1 (see step S662A), and start variable display of the next rendering pattern. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the chance symbol as the stop symbol of the effect pattern based on the fact that "change in change pattern at symbol change" is determined as the effect mode of the advance notice effect. . Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (6), predetermined effects are performed such as displaying an aspect such that a flash is emitted above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of variation of the effect pattern (see step S8108). In addition, the predetermined effect performed at the time of the fluctuation start of the effect design is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 51, for example, movable members provided above, below or to the side of the effect display device 9 (e.g. The movable object having the above-described shape may be moved at the start of fluctuation, or a predetermined lamp may be lit or blinked at the start of fluctuation. In addition, for example, the method of starting the fluctuation of the symbol may be different from the normal one when the fluctuation of the rendering symbol starts. For example, to make the left middle right production pattern usually start changing at the same time, start the left middle left fluctuation design pattern at different timing, or start up (or down) movement once And may start to shift downward (or upward). Also, conversely, the manner of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol in FIG. 51 (5) may be different from the normal. For example, the order of stopping the symbols may be different from the normal order, such as stopping the symbols in the order of left, right and middle in the order of left, right and middle.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (7), the fluctuation display of the production symbol is executed (see step S8105), and as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the fluctuation time is over and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed ( See step S8302). Also in the cases shown in FIGS. 51 (6) and (7), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbols. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve memory number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 51 (9), the suspension display on the total storage storage display unit 18c. 1 by 1 (see step S662A), and start variable display of the next rendering pattern. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the chance symbol as the stop symbol of the effect pattern based on the fact that "change in change pattern at symbol change" is determined as the effect mode of the advance notice effect. . Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (9), predetermined effects are performed such as displaying an aspect such that a flash is emitted above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of variation of the effect pattern (see step S8108). In addition, also in the case shown in FIG. 51 (9), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol.

  Thereafter, the previewing advance notice effect is executed in the same effect mode until the variable display based on the starting winning combination that is the target of the winning determination is started. In addition, when performing the variable display based on the start winning combination which is the target of the determination at the time of winning, a similar notice effect of the effect mode may be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51, during the execution of the variation display of the production symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed also in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, and the stop symbol of the production symbol When stopped and displayed, the stopped symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed also in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol continues to be displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol until the next variable display is started. Therefore, in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is always displayed or the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, this is the same also when performing pre-reading advance notice production by the production | presentation aspect of FIGS. 52-54 shown below. In the case of transition to the jackpot gaming state, the display in the fourth symbol display area may not be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a specific example of the effect mode of the advance notice of “mode shift” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 52, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (2), when the variable display of the effect symbol is being executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 52 (1) It is assumed that the first start winning opening 13 has a start winning. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize effect process based on the fact that there is a new start winning (see step S 1217). Then, a prize determination result specification command (symbol designation command, variation category command) according to the prize determination result is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Further, within the same interrupt, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a first start winning combination designation command and a total holding number-of-retentions storage number designation command as suspension storage information (see steps S 1220 and S 1221), As shown in FIG. 52 (2), the suspension display on the total suspension storage display unit 18c (in this example, the first normal display) based on the received first start winning specification command and the total suspension storage number specification command. Is increased by 1 (see step S6021). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the advance notice effect based on the reception of the prize determination result specification command and determines the “mode shift” as the effect mode of the advance notice effect. (See step S800A). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time is over and the disappointing symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 52 (1) and (2), during the variation display of the effect symbols, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve memory number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 1 by 1 (see step S662A), and start variable display of the next rendering pattern. In this case, as shown in FIG. 52 (4), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the effect pattern is being changed, based on the fact that “mode transition” is determined as the effect mode of the advance notice effect. Effects such as the background screen of the sea and the background of the mountain in which another background screen can be interrupted from the side of the background screen currently displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and two background screens are superimposed An effect of an aspect such as conflicting with the screen is executed (see step S8108). Then, after the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), an effect is performed such that the original background screen is finally pushed back (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. In 5), the off symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, also in the case shown in FIG. 52 (4), during the variable display of the production symbol, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve memory number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 52 (6), the suspension display on the total storage storage display unit 18c. 1 by 1 (see step S662A), and start variable display of the next rendering pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (6), the effect control microcomputer 100 produces an effect during fluctuation display of the effect pattern based on the fact that "mode transition" is determined as the effect mode of the advance notice effect effect. Rendering in a mode in which another background screen can be interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the display device 9 and the two background screens merge (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen An execution of an aspect such as conflicting) is executed (see step S8108). Then, after the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), an effect is performed such that the original background screen is finally pushed back (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. In 7), the off symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, also in the case shown in FIG. 52 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 52 (7).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve memory number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the suspension display on the total storage storage display unit 18c. 1 by 1 (see step S662A), and start variable display of the next rendering pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the effect control microcomputer 100 produces an effect during variation display of the effect pattern based on the fact that "mode transition" is determined as the effect mode of the advance notice effect effect. Rendering in a mode in which another background screen can be interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the display device 9 and the two background screens merge (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen An execution of an aspect such as conflicting) is executed (see step S8108). Then, after the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 52 (9), an effect is performed such that the original background screen is finally pushed back (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 52 (FIG. In 9), the off symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, also in the case shown in FIG. 52 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 52 (9), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  In the above-described manner, the previewed advance notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the starting winning combination which is the target of the determination at the time of winning is started. In addition, when performing the variable display based on the start winning combination which is the target of the determination at the time of winning, a similar notice effect of the effect mode may be executed. In this case, when the display result of the variable display based on the starting winning combination that is the target of the winning determination is "big hit", for example, after performing an effect in which two background screens are in conflict, the final While the background screen of the person who has been interrupted from the side wins and the background screen is switched, the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, the mode of the previewing notice effect of “mode transition” is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and for example, it is not to be pushed back to the original background screen at the end of fluctuation for every fluctuation display. An effect may be performed such that the background screen changes for each display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a specific example of the effect mode of the advance notice of “countdown” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 53, first, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is being executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 53 (1). It is assumed that the first start winning opening 13 has a start winning. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize effect process based on the fact that there is a new start winning (see step S 1217). Then, a prize determination result specification command (symbol designation command, variation category command) according to the prize determination result is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Further, within the same interrupt, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a first start winning combination designation command and a total holding number-of-retentions storage number designation command as suspension storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221), and the microcomputer 100 for effect control As shown in FIG. 53 (2), the suspension display in the accumulation suspension storage display unit 18c is performed (in this example, the first normal display) based on the received first start winning combination designation command and the total suspension storage number specification command. Is increased by 1 (see step S6021). In this case, it is assumed that the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the advance notice advance effect and determines the "countdown" as the effect mode of the advance notice effect based on the reception of the prize determination result specification command. (See step S800A). In addition, what is necessary is just to let count number in pre-reading advance notice production of "countdown", for example, be the total pending storage number when it is decided to execute pre-reading advance production. In addition, on the condition that there is a predetermined number (for example, two or more) of pending storages in which the countdown can be performed, it may be configured to be able to determine the advance notice effect of “countdown”. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time is over and the disappointing symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 53 (1) and 53 (2), during the variable display of the production symbols, the variable display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 53 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 1 by 1 (see step S662A), and start variable display of the next rendering pattern. In this case, based on the fact that the "countdown" is determined as the effect mode of the previewed advance effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 produces an effect during the fluctuation display of the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. A character string such as “count 3!” Is displayed on the display screen of the display device 9, and an effect is performed as if the countdown was started (see step S8108). Then, after the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the final stop symbol (in FIG. 53 (5), the dislocated symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, also in the case shown in FIG. 53 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve memory number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 53 (6), the suspension display in the total storage suspension display unit 18c. 1 by 1 (see step S662A), and start variable display of the next rendering pattern. Also, based on the fact that the "countdown" is determined as the effect mode of the previewed advance effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays an effect during fluctuation display of the effect pattern as shown in FIG. 53 (6). A character string such as “count 2!” Is displayed on the display screen of the device 9, and an effect in a manner of continuously counting down is executed (see step S8108). Then, after the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), the final stop symbol (in FIG. 53 (7), the dislocated symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, also in the case shown in FIG. 53 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the rendering symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve memory number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the suspension display on the total storage storage display unit 18c. 1 by 1 (see step S662A), and start variable display of the next rendering pattern. In addition, based on the fact that the "countdown" is determined as the effect mode of the previewed advance effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays an effect during fluctuation display of the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. A character string such as “count 1!” Is displayed on the display screen of the device 9 and an effect in a manner of continuously counting down is performed (see step S8108). Then, the fluctuation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 53 (9), the final stop symbol (in FIG. 53 (9), the dislocated symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, also in the case shown in FIG. 53 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the rendering symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 53 (9), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  In the above-described manner, the previewed advance notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the starting winning combination which is the target of the determination at the time of winning is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a specific example of the effect mode of the advance notice effect of “change in holding ball” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 54, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is being executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 54 (1). It is assumed that the first start winning opening 13 has a start winning. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize effect process based on the fact that there is a new start winning (see step S 1217). Then, a prize determination result specification command (symbol designation command, variation category command) according to the prize determination result is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Further, within the same interrupt, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a first start winning combination designation command and a total hold storage number designation command as hold storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines "retention ball change" as the effect mode of the advance notice effect based on the reception of the winning judgment result specifying command, and determines the execution of the advance notice effect. (Refer to steps S6010 and S6011). Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (2), the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the first normal display on the combined holding storage display unit 18c based on the received first start winning specifying command and the combined holding storage number specifying command. (White holding ball) is increased by 1 (see step S6017A). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the shape change as the aspect of the holding ball change (see step S6018A), determines "split" as the shape (see step S6019B), and determines "B14" as the effect. And (step S6019D). Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time is over and the disappointing symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 54 (1) and (2), during the variable display of the effect symbols, the variable display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 54 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result specification command, and the total storage reserve memory number subtraction specification command, and as shown in FIG. 54 (4), the suspension display on the total storage storage display unit 18 c 1 by 1 (see step S662A), and start variable display of the next rendering pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (4), each hold display is shifted one by one. Then, as shown in FIGS. 54 (4) and (5), the effect control microcomputer 100, with the start of the change display of the effect pattern (at the timing immediately after the start of the change display in this example), the effect number The rendering of B14 is also started (see step S8108). In the effect of this effect number B14, a dwarf appears (FIG. 54 (5)), performs an operation of dividing the storage ball in the third display area with a hammer, and divides the storage ball (FIG. 54 (6)), The dwarf comes home (Fig. 54 (7)). A pictogram of S (first special display (S)) appears from among the broken holding balls, and this will be a holding display thereafter. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 54 (8), the final stop symbol (in FIG. 54 (8), the dislocated symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, also when showing to FIG. 54 (4)-(7), the fluctuation display of the 4th symbol is performed in the 4th symbol display area 9c for 1st special symbols during the fluctuation | variation display of production | presentation symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 54 (8), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve memory number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 1 by 1 (see step S662A), and start variable display of the next rendering pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (9), each hold display including the remaining first special display is shifted one by one, and the advance notice of the effect mode of “change in holding ball” continues. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 54 (10), the final stop symbol (in FIG. 54 (10) the dislocated symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, also in the case shown in FIG. 54 (9), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command, as shown in FIG. 54 (10), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve memory number subtraction designation command, and reduces the suspension display in the total suspension storage display unit 18c by 1 (see step S662A). Start the fluctuation display of the production pattern of. Then, the respective hold displays including the remaining first special display are shifted one by one, and the advance notice of the presentation mode of the “hold ball change” is continued. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302).

  In the above-described manner, the previewed advance notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the starting winning combination which is the target of the determination at the time of winning is started. Then, until the reserve storage is digested for each variable display and the reserve display (the first special display in the example shown in FIG. 54) of the advance notice object is erased from the total reserve storage display unit 18c, The preview notice of the presentation mode of "is continued.

  Next, the execution timing of the pre-reading advance notice effect will be described. FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 are explanatory diagrams showing the execution timing of the pre-reading advance notice effect. Among these, FIG. 55 shows the execution timing of the advance notice of the "present change of the change pattern at the time of symbol change". Moreover, FIG. 56 shows the execution timing of the advance notice announcement effect of "the holding ball change". The execution timings of the advance notice effects of "mode transition" and "countdown" are the same as those of the execution timing of the advance notice effect of "change in change pattern at symbol change" shown in FIG. Further, in the examples shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, there is shown a case where a new start winning combination occurs while the special symbols and the variation symbols of the effect symbols are displayed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 55, the execution timing of the advance notice of the “present change in change pattern at symbol change” will be described. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning for the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes a winning processing process (see steps S1217 and S1228). Make a winning judgment. In the example shown in FIG. 55, it is assumed that there is a new start winning combination in the fluctuation display A of the effect design, and the winning determination is made. Then, based on the determination result of the winning determination, the winning determination result specifying command (design designation command, variation category command) is transmitted (refer to steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230) and, within the same interrupt, pending storage information The start winning combination designation command (the first start winning combination designation command or the second start winning combination designation command) and the combined hold storage number designation command are transmitted as (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 55, it is assumed that the total number of pending storages before reception of the winning determination determination result designation command and the pending storage information is 3 and the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the variation of the effect pattern A It is assumed that the total number of pending storages has become 4 due to the start winning prize in the middle. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the prefetch advance notice effect determination processing based on the received winning time determination result specification command (see step S800A), and reads ahead notice effect in the prefetch notice effect mode determination process (see step S6010). It is assumed that "a change of the change form at the time of symbol change" is determined as the effect mode of. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the current total number of pending storages (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 55) in the fluctuation number counter (see step S6014). Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display A ends, the value of the fluctuation number counter is decremented by 1 to 3 (see step S8312).

  Subsequently, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve number subtraction designation command are received, and the next variation display B is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the chance symbol as the stop symbol of the effect pattern based on the fact that "change in change pattern at symbol change" is determined as the effect mode of the advance notice effect. It shall be. Then, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display B ends, as shown in FIG. 55, the chance symbol pattern a is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter to be 2 (see step S8312). That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, when executing the advance notice of “change in change pattern at symbol change”, start winning is newly generated during change display A and read ahead If it is determined to execute the advance notice effect, the advance notice notice effect is started from the next variable display B.

  Furthermore, when the next variable display C is started, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect display device at the start of the change of the effect pattern as shown in FIG. 55 based on the value of the change number counter being 2. By performing a predetermined effect b such as displaying an aspect in which the flash is illuminated above the display screen 9 (see step S8108), the preview advance notice effect is continuously executed. Then, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display C ends, as shown in FIG. 55, the chance symbol b is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter to be 1 (see step S8312).

  Furthermore, when the next variable display D is started, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect display device at the start of the change of the effect pattern as shown in FIG. 55 based on the value of the change number counter being 1. By performing a predetermined effect c such as displaying an aspect in which the flash is illuminated above the display screen 9 (see step S8108), the preview advance notice effect is continuously executed. Then, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display D ends, as shown in FIG. 55, the chance symbol pattern c is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter to make it 0 (see step S8312). Then, based on the fact that the value of the fluctuation number counter has become 0, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the pre-reading notice executing flag that has been set (see steps S8313 and S8316), and performs pre-reading notice effect finish.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, there is shown a case where the advance notice is given during the fluctuation display up to the fluctuation display D immediately before the fluctuation display E targeted for the winning determination. However, the preview advance notice effect may be executed even during the variable display E targeted for the winning determination. In this embodiment, since the advance notice effect is not executed in the variable display E which is the target of the winning determination, the advance notice effect and the super reach effect are performed during one change display E. Both are executed to prevent the production from becoming irritably unnatural (in particular, it reliably prevents the rendering from being squeezed just before the end of the variable display). In addition, when performing preview advance notice production even during the fluctuation display E which is the target of the judgment at the time of winning, the preview notice production is executed before the production of the super reach in the fluctuation display E is executed, and the prefetching is performed Super reach presentation may be performed after the advance presentation is over.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the execution timing of the advance notice announcement effect of “hold ball change” will be described. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning for the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes a winning processing process (see steps S1217 and S1228). Make a winning judgment. In the example shown in FIG. 56, it is assumed that there is a new start winning combination in the fluctuation display A of the effect design, and the winning determination is made. Then, based on the determination result of the winning determination, the winning determination result specifying command (design designation command, variation category command) is transmitted (refer to steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230) and, within the same interrupt, pending storage information The start winning combination designation command (the first start winning combination designation command or the second start winning combination designation command) and the combined hold storage number designation command are transmitted as (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 56, it is assumed that the total number of pending storages before reception of the prize determination result specifying command and the pending storage information is three, and the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the variation display A of the effect symbol. It is assumed that the total number of pending storages has become 4 due to the start winning prize in the middle. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the prefetch advance notice effect determination processing based on the received winning time determination result specification command (see step S800A), and reads ahead notice effect in the prefetch notice effect mode determination process (see step S6010). It is assumed that “retention ball change” is determined as the effect mode of, and the effect system (see step S6018A), the change mode (see steps S6018B and S6019B), and the effect number (see steps S6018D and S6019D). Then, by determining "hold ball change" as the effect mode of the advance notice advance effect effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the sum on hold storage based on the received first start prize specification command and the total on hold storage number specification command. The first normal display or the second normal display is increased by 1 on the display unit 18c (see steps S6017A and S6017B). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag under pre-reading advance notice execution and sets a flag under holding ball change effect execution.

  Subsequently, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve number subtraction designation command are received, and the next variation display B is started. Then, the suspension display in the total suspension storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each suspension display including the remaining first normal display or second normal display is shifted one by one, and the effect control microcomputer 100 At the timing immediately after the start of the variable display B, the advance notice of the determined effect number is started. This effect is executed during the variable display B (see step S8108), and during the variable display B, the first normal display or the second normal display changes to the first special display or the second special display. Note that, with the stop of the variable display B, the holding ball change effect execution flag is reset (see step S8317).

  Thereafter, each time the variable display C and the variable display D are started, the hold display in the total hold memory display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each hold including the remaining first special display or second special display. The display is shifted one by one, and as shown in FIG. 56, the advance notice of the presentation mode of the “retention ball change” continues. Then, when the variable display E of the notice target is started, the hold display corresponding to the change display of the notice target is digested, and the hold display (the first special display or the second special display) of the notice target is added up. It is erased from the holding storage display unit 18c, and as shown in FIG. 56, the advance notice of the effect mode of "change in holding ball" is ended. It should be noted that, with the start of the variable display E of the advance notice target, the pre-reading advance notice executing flag is reset (see step S662B).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the execution timing of the advance notice of “presence ball change” when the shortening fluctuation (for example, fluctuation pattern “non-reach PA1-2” shown in FIG. 6) occurs will be described. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning for the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes a winning processing process (see steps S1217 and S1228). Make a winning judgment. In the example shown in FIG. 56, it is assumed that there is a new start winning combination in the fluctuation display A of the effect design, and the winning determination is made. Then, based on the determination result of the winning determination, the winning determination result specifying command (design designation command, variation category command) is transmitted (refer to steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230) and, within the same interrupt, pending storage information The start winning combination designation command (the first start winning combination designation command or the second start winning combination designation command) and the combined hold storage number designation command are transmitted as (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 67, it is assumed that the total number of pending storages before reception of the winning determination determination result designation command and the pending storage information is 3, and the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the variation of the effect pattern It is assumed that the total number of pending storages has become 4 due to the start winning prize in the middle. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the prefetch advance notice effect determination processing based on the received winning time determination result specification command (see step S800A), and reads ahead notice effect in the prefetch notice effect mode determination process (see step S6010). It is assumed that “retention ball change” is determined as the effect mode of, and the effect system (see step S6018A), the change mode (see steps S6018B and S6019B), and the effect number (see steps S6018D and S6019D). Then, by determining "hold ball change" as the effect mode of the advance notice advance effect effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the sum on hold storage based on the received first start prize specification command and the total on hold storage number specification command. The first normal display or the second normal display is increased by 1 on the display unit 18c (see steps S6017A and S6017B). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag under pre-reading advance notice execution and sets a flag under holding ball change effect execution.

  Subsequently, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total storage reserve number subtraction designation command are received, and the next variation display B is started. Then, the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is decreased by 1 (see step S662A), and the remaining pending displays including the first normal display or the second normal display are shifted one by one. Here, the fluctuation display B is a shortening fluctuation, and it is assumed that the holding ball change presentation time of the determined effect number 変 動 the fluctuation time. At this time, a determination is made as NO in step S8017B, and a process is performed in which the determined effect is carried over to the next variation in step S8017C. Therefore, the determined effect is not executed in step S8108, and even if the fluctuation display B is stopped, the holding ball change effect execution flag remains set (see step S8317).

  Next, a fluctuation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a total holding memory number subtraction designation command are received, and the next fluctuation display C is started. Then, the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is decreased by 1 (see step S662A), and the remaining pending displays including the first normal display or the second normal display are shifted one by one. Here, it is assumed that the fluctuation display C is not the shortening fluctuation, but the holding ball change presentation time of the determined effect number <the fluctuation time. At this time, YES is determined in step S8017A and YES in step S8017B, and therefore the carry-over process of step S8017C is not performed. Accordingly, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts the advance notice of the determined effect number at the timing immediately after the start of the variable display C. This effect is executed during the variable display C (see step S8108), and during the variable display C, the first normal display or the second normal display changes to the first special display or the second special display. Note that, with the stop of the variable display C, the holding ball change effect execution flag is reset (see step S8317).

  Thereafter, when the variable display D is started, the hold display in the total hold storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each of the hold displays including the remaining first special display or second special display is As it is shifted, as shown in FIG. 67, the advance notice of the effect mode of “change in holding ball” continues. Then, when the variable display E of the notice target is started, the hold display corresponding to the change display of the notice target is digested, and the hold display (the first special display or the second special display) of the notice target is added up. It is erased from the holding storage display unit 18c, and as shown in FIG. 67, the advance notice of the effect mode of "change in holding ball" is ended. It should be noted that, with the start of the variable display E of the advance notice target, the pre-reading advance notice executing flag is reset (see step S662B).

  Next, the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period will be described. FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the prefetching advance notice setting limit period. Among these, FIG. 57 shows a pre-read notice setting restriction period in the case where the start-up winning a prize designation command as hold storage information is missed. Further, FIG. 58 shows a pre-read notice setting restriction period in the case where the variation category command as the determination result information is missed. The prefetching advance notice setting limitation period in the case where the combined holding memory number designation command or the symbol designation command is dropped or inconsistencies occur in the received command is also the same as in FIGS. 57 and 58.

  First, with reference to FIG. 57, the case where the start winning combination designation command is missed will be described. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning for the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes a winning processing process (see steps S1217 and S1228). Make a winning judgment. In the example shown in FIG. 57, it is assumed that there is a new start winning combination in the fluctuation display A of the effect symbol, and the winning determination is made. Then, based on the determination result of the winning determination, control is performed to transmit the winning determination result specifying command (design designation command, variation category command) (see steps S 1218, S 1219, S 1229, S 1230) and within the same interrupt. Control is performed to transmit a start winning combination designation command (first start winning combination designation command or second start winning combination designation command) and a total hold storage number specification command as suspension storage information (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231 and S1232).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 57, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts up as shown in FIG. 57 due to some cause (for example, an abnormality or data corruption occurred in the transmission process on the game control microcomputer 560 side). It is assumed that the prize designation command can not be received normally. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the command at the start winning combination can not be received normally (see steps S6004 to S6006), sets the prefetch advance notice setting restriction flag (see step S6033), and performs prefetch advance notice. Control within the set limit period.

  Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether the storage state storage area where the command could not be received correctly remains in the start winning winning command storage area each time the variable display B to D is started. Confirm (see steps S8002 to S8004), and as shown in FIG. 57, the storage area of the storage state in which the command could not be received correctly at the timing of starting the variable display E for the pending storage causing the prefetch notice setting limitation. If it is determined that there is no longer, the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is reset (see step S8005), and the pre-reading notice setting restriction period is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the case where the variation category command is dropped will be described. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning for the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes a winning processing process (see steps S1217 and S1228). Make a winning judgment. In the example shown in FIG. 58, it is assumed that there is a new start winning combination in the fluctuation display A of the effect symbol, and the winning determination is made. Then, based on the determination result of the winning determination, control is performed to transmit the winning determination result specifying command (design designation command, variation category command) (see steps S 1218, S 1219, S 1229, S 1230) and within the same interrupt. Control is performed to transmit a start winning combination designation command (first start winning combination designation command or second start winning combination designation command) and a total hold storage number specification command as suspension storage information (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231 and S1232).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 58, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes, as shown in FIG. 58, due to some cause (for example, an abnormality or data corruption occurring in transmission processing on the game control microcomputer 560 side). It is assumed that the category command could not be received normally. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the command at the start winning combination can not be received normally (see steps S6004 to S6006), sets the prefetch advance notice setting restriction flag (see step S6033), and performs prefetch advance notice. Control within the set limit period.

  Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether the storage state storage area where the command could not be received correctly remains in the start winning winning command storage area each time the variable display B to D is started. Confirm (see steps S8002 to S8004), and as shown in FIG. 58, the storage area of the storage state in which the command could not be received correctly at the timing of starting the variable display E for the pending storage causing the prefetch notice setting limitation. If it is determined that there is no longer, the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is reset (see step S8005), and the pre-reading notice setting restriction period is ended.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit, a big hit type, a variation pattern type when the start winning occurs. Send pending storage information (in this example, start winning combination designation command and total pending storage number specification command) so that it can be recognized that the first pending storage or the second pending storage has increased, and whether it will be a big hit or a small hit Or, determination result information (in this example, a symbol specifying command and a variation category command) indicating the determination result of the jackpot type and the variation pattern type is transmitted. Further, based on the determination result information, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes pre-reading advance notice effect to give notice that there is a possibility of becoming a predetermined state (in this example, super reach), and is included in the suspension storage information. In the case where it is not possible to normally receive the start-up winning design command, the execution of the preview advance notice effect is limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reduction in the reliability of the pre-reading advance notice effect.

  That is, the determination result information (in this example, the symbol designating command and the variation category command) and the pending storage information (in this example, the starting winning assignment designating command and the combined pending storage) are collectively received within one timer interrupt at the start winning combination. If a dropout occurs even with some commands among the number specification commands), there is a risk that the contents of the received commands may not be reliable even if other commands received in a batch are received. If pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the received command as it is, inconsistency occurs between the contents of pre-reading notice effect and the contents of the fluctuation display of the notice object that is actually executed. There is a risk that the reliability may be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, the reliability of the pre-reading advance notice effect is lowered by restricting the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect when the start winning combination designation command included in the pending storage information can not be received normally. To prevent.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the variation based on the one pending storage can not be received normally when the start winning combination designation command included in the pending storage information transmitted based on the one pending storage can not be received normally. Limit the execution of the advance notice effect until the display starts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reduction in the reliability of the preview advance presentation effect due to the inconsistencies in the preview advance presentation effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is not possible to normally receive the determination result information (in this example, the symbol designation command and the variation category command) transmitted based on the one pending storage, one Until the variable display based on the pending storage of is started, the execution of the previewing preview effect is limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reduction in the reliability of the preview advance presentation effect due to the inconsistencies in the preview advance presentation effect.

  In this embodiment, there is a case where the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted from the time when the command is missed or inconsistent until the pending memory where the command is missed or inconsistent is digested. Although it is shown, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is limited only to the pending storage where the command is missed or inconsistent, and the command at the time of starting winning is normally executed for the pending storage generated thereafter. If reception is possible, the execution of the prefetch advance notice effect may not be restricted even before the pending storage in which the command is missed or mismatched is digested. When configured as such, for example, the process of checking the preview advance notice setting restriction flag of step S6003 of the preview notice effect determination process, the process of setting the undecided information of step S6031, the step S8000 to S8014 of effect pattern variation start process Processing is unnecessary.

  Further, in this embodiment, there is shown a case where it is configured not to make the decision of the pre-reading preview effect itself when the command is missed or inconsistent, but it is made to decide the pre-reading preview effect itself. , Its execution may be restricted. For example, when a dropout or inconsistency of a command is detected in the judgment processing of steps S6004 to S6006 in the prefetch notice generation determination process, the processing of step S6033 is executed to set a prefetch notice setting restriction flag, while steps S6004 to S6006 Regardless of the determination result of and the presence or absence of the pre-read advance notice setting restriction flag, the process of determining the pre-read advance notice effect in steps S6007 to S6019E may be executed without fail. Then, if the pre-reading advance notice setting restriction flag is set, the pre-reading advance notice effect may be restricted so as not to perform the process of step S8108 of the effect symbol variation processing. Further, as described above, the processing of determining the advance announcement notice effect in steps S6007 to S6019E is always executed, and then, for example, the execution timing of the process of step S8108 of the processing during effect design variation (execution of advance notice effect At the timing), it is checked every time whether there is a dropout or inconsistency among the commands stored in the start winning command storage area, and there is a dropout or inconsistency. If something remains, it may be limited so as not to carry out the preview advance notice effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines, as the determination result information, whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit, and a symbol designation command capable of specifying the determination result of the big hit type, and a predetermined It transmits a change category command that can specify whether or not to be a state (in this example, super reach). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 restricts the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect even when the determination result specified by the received symbol specification command contradicts the determination result specified by the received variation category command. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the reduction in the reliability of the previewed preview effect due to the incompatibility of the previewed preview effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the advance notice effect, the notice effect starting at a timing other than the timing at which the start winning is generated (in this example, the timing when the next variable display is started after the start winning is generated) (In this example, “prediction notice effect of“ change in change pattern at symbol change ”,“ mode transition ”,“ countdown ”, and“ hold ball change ”) can be executed. Then, the microcomputer for effect control 100 is stored when the variable display based on the one pending storage is started, and the execution of the preview advance notice effect is restricted after the restriction on the execution of the advance notice effect is released. The advance notice effect can be executed based on the pending storage. Therefore, since it is possible to early release the restriction state of the advance notice effect without making the sense contents of the advance notice effect feel uncomfortable, it is possible to prevent the decrease of the appearance frequency of the advance notice effect, and the fun for the game. Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is a continuous effect which is executed in a continuous manner over a plurality of variable displays as the advance notice effect (in the present embodiment, the advance notice effect of “countdown”). Based on the pending storage stored when the execution of the preview advance notice effect is restricted after the variable display based on the one pending memory is started and the restriction on the execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is released. As the pre-read advance notice effect to be executed, the execution of the continuous effect is limited. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to prevent that the predictive display effect performed after the restriction on the execution of the predictive advance effect is canceled becomes difficult to understand the variable display to be the object of the advance notice.

  Further, in this embodiment, the microcomputer for effect control 100 starts the variable display based on one pending storage, and after the restriction on the execution of the advance notice effect is released, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted. It may be configured not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the pending storage stored when the user is present (for example, after executing the processing of step S8005 in the effect symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. (It is not necessary to execute the processing of steps S8006 to S8014). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in processing load and program capacity required to determine whether or not to perform preview advance notice effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the start winning combination designation command and the combined hold storage number designation command as the hold storage information. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 also restricts the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect even when the specified result of the received start winning specified command contradicts the specified result of the received total holding number of memories specified command. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the reduction in the reliability of the pre-reading advance notice effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined that it is determined to be a super reach, the first mode ("countdown" in this example) or the second mode (in this example, "symbol change time" Of "the change of the change mode", "mode transition") can be executed, and when it is determined that it is determined not to be the super reach, it is possible to execute the prefetching announcement effect of the second mode. . Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 can execute the prefetch notice effect of the second mode even when the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted. For this reason, the second embodiment of the prefetching preview effect that can be performed both in the case of becoming a super reach and in the case of not being a super reach can be performed even when execution of the prefetching preview effect is restricted. After securing the reliability of the effect, the appearance frequency of the advance notice effect can be secured to a certain extent, and the interest for the game can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the microcomputer 560 for game control changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the order of starting winning in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening. Execute the display. Then, even if the start control winning designation command can not be received normally, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the total hold pending storage count specifying command and the judgment result information (design designation command, variation category command). In the case of receiving, it is possible to execute the notice effect of the second aspect. Therefore, even if the start winning combination designation command can not be received normally, the super reach can be obtained when the combined hold storage number designation command and the determination result information (pattern designation command, variation category command) are received. The second aspect of the preview effect that can be performed in both cases and not can be performed, so that the appearance frequency of the prefetching preview effect is also to some extent while preventing the reliability of the prefetching preview effect from decreasing. It is possible to secure and to improve the interest for the game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 restricts the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect even when the hold storage information and the determination result information can not be received in the proper order. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the reduction in the reliability of the pre-reading advance notice effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the hold display on the total hold storage display unit 18c based on the hold storage information. Then, even if it is not possible to normally receive pending storage information or determination result information, if it is recognized that the first pending storage or the second pending storage has increased, the increased pending storage The display mode of the corresponding hold display is displayed in a special display mode (in this example, the hold display of the dropout mode) different from the normal display mode (in this example, the first normal display and the second normal display). Therefore, even if the pending storage information or the determination result information can not be received normally, the number of pending storage can be recognized by the player, preventing the player from having a sense of distrust can do.

  In this embodiment, the case is shown where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in the variable order of the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, for example. The variable display of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed with priority, as compared to the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the winning order. When the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be preferentially executed as described above, instead of the start winning combination designation command and the total number of pending storage number designation commands as the pending storage information, the first pending storage number or second A pending storage number addition designation command (a first pending storage number addition designation command or a second pending storage number addition designation command) indicating that the pending storage number has increased may be transmitted. That is, when a start winning combination occurs, a set of three commands of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending storage count addition designation command may be collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt. Even in such a configuration, the effect control microcomputer 100 limits the execution of the pre-read advance notice effect based on the dropping of the hold storage number addition designation command as the hold storage information. Good. In this case, as the pending storage information, the first pending storage number addition designation command capable of recognizing which of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has simply increased as described above, and the second pending storage number addition The designated command may be transmitted, and a first pending storage number designation command in which the first pending storage number is set as EXT data, or a second pending storage number specification command in which the second pending storage number is set as EXT data You may make it transmit.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a method of managing the prefetching notice setting restriction period, a case of managing using the prefetching notice setting restriction flag is shown, but a management method of the prefetching notice setting restriction period is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to

(1) For example, without performing management using a flag such as a prefetch advance notice setting restriction flag, it is a timing to determine whether or not it is during a preview notice advance setting restriction period (for example, step S6002 of a prefetch notice effect determination process) Or, every time when step S 8000 of the effect design fluctuation start process), the commands stored in all the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area are confirmed, and the command is missed or inconsistent. It may be determined each time whether or not there is a state in which it remains. Then, if there is even one state in which a command is missed or inconsistencies, it is determined that it is in the pre-read notice setting restriction period, and the command is missed or inconsistent. If there is nothing, it may be determined that it is not in the pre-reading advance notice setting restriction period.

(2) Also, for example, even when management is performed using a flag such as the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag, the number of times of the variable display until the pending storage causing the prefetch advance notice setting restriction is digested is Control is performed using a counter, and it is determined that the pending notice setting limitation flag is reset based on the judgment that the pending storage causing the read ahead notice setting limitation is digested, and control is made to end the prefetch notice setting limitation period. May be In this case, for example, when the prefetch advance notice setting restriction flag is set in step S6033 of the prefetch advance notice effect determination processing and the prefetch advance notice setting restriction period is started, the present total pending storage number is set in the counter. Subtract the value of that counter by one. Then, when the value of the counter becomes 0, it is determined that the pending storage causing the prefetch notice setting restriction is digested, and the prefetch notice setting restriction flag is reset to end the prefetch notice setting restriction period. Good. In this case, after the prefetch notice setting restriction flag is set and the prefetch notice setting restriction period is started, if any further dropping or inconsistency of the command occurs before the prefetch notice setting restriction period is started, The total number of pending storages may be reset in the counter to extend the prefetching notice setting limit period until the pending storage corresponding to the dropout or inconsistency of the command generated later is digested.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the big hit game is always controlled to a definite change state (high probability state) after the end of the big hit game, and a predetermined number of changes (71 times in this example) after the big hit game ends. Although the case where it applies to the game machine which ends a definite change state (high probability state) based on having finished a display was shown, the game machine which can apply the composition shown in this embodiment is such a game It is not limited to the machine. For example, as a big hit type, this embodiment shows a gaming machine provided with a normal big hit controlled only in a high base state (time saving state) other than a probability change big hit controlled to a definite change state after a big hit game end. A configuration for performing setting and execution of the prefetch advance notice effect, and a configuration for limiting the setting and execution of the prefetch notice effect may be applied. In this case, for example, when it becomes a probability variation big hit, while controlling to the probability variation state after the big hit game end, it is possible to continue the probability variation state until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when it becomes the big hit normally, while controlling to high base state (time short state) after the big hit game end, high base state at the timing which ends the fluctuation indication of specified frequency (for example, 100 times) after the big hit game end The (time saving state) may be ended. In addition, when such a game machine is configured to provide a sudden big hit or a small hit, it is a high base state in order to make it difficult to recognize whether or not it is controlled to a positive change state (high probability state). Sometimes when suddenly a big hit in the odds, suddenly control the high probability state after the end of the big hit game based on the big hit suddenly and keep the high base state, suddenly became a big hit in the low base state In this case, it is desirable to control the high base state only after the end of the big hit game based on the sudden odd variation big hit and not to control the high base state (maintain the low base state).

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the substrate on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is It may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27 etc.) Two substrates with two effect control substrates may be provided.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, FIG. 3). (Sound / lamp board) having a function by the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 or the sound output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 or the like and a function by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35 The control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  In the above embodiment, as the effect to be executed on the pending display when changing the display mode of the pending display, a presentation system that suggests the possibility of a big hit (big hit expectation), and the possibility of super reach (super reach) Although the example which has two of the production | presentation system which suggests an expectation degree was demonstrated, not only two but three or more production | generation systems may exist. For example, a rendering system may be added that indicates the possibility of probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation expectation). Whether or not a probability change occurs can be confirmed by a change category command or a symbol designation command received by the effect control microcomputer 100. Furthermore, the rendering system is not limited to the one shown here, and can be determined arbitrarily, such as a rendering system that indicates the possibility of normal reach (normal reach expectation).

  In the above embodiment, as the effect to be executed on the pending display when changing the display mode of the pending display, a presentation system that suggests the possibility of a big hit (big hit expectation), and the possibility of super reach (super reach) However, the number of rounds in the case of becoming a big hit may be not limited to this, but may be, for example, a production line that indicates the expected level of probability big hit (certainly big hit or positive big hit) It may be a rendering system that suggests (15 R or 2 R?). In addition, it may be a rendering system that indicates the number of fluctuations with time reduction (for example, 50 times or 100 times in the case of a big hit), and the degree of expectation of rank up bonus (rank up bonus or ordinary It may be a rendering system that suggests a bonus).

  Although the above-mentioned embodiment explained the example to which the color of a reservation display changes to three steps of "no change", "blue", and "red" by the production system which suggests a big hit expectation, it is not limited to this, The degree of expectation may be further subdivided by, for example, setting a color (for example, yellow) between the degree of expectation between blue and red. Moreover, although said embodiment demonstrated the example to which the shape of a reservation display changes into two steps of "it does not break" and "split" by the production | presentation system which suggests super reach expectation, it does not restrict to this, The degree of expectation may be further subdivided by, for example, setting the shape of the degree of expectation between "not" and "split" (for example, "partially split").

  In the above embodiment, although an example in which the change mode of the hold display is a color or a shape has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a change mode of the hold display Also, a motif may be added to the holding ball.

  In the above-described embodiment, in any of the performance system indicating the big hit expectation and the production system indicating the super reach expectation, when the giant appears, the hold display is likely to change, and when the dwarf appears, the hold display changes. Although a difficult example has been described, conditions for the pending display to be easily changed or hard to change may be made different for a plurality of effect systems. For example, in a production system that suggests a big hit expectation, when a giant appears, the hold display is likely to change, and when a dwarf appears, the hold display is less likely to change, and in a production system that suggests a super reach expectation, an appearance character Instead, the ratio of the easy-to-change or hard-to-change pending display may be made different depending on the color of the hammer possessed by the appearing character (for example, gold is easy to change and tea is hard to change). In addition, in the production system that suggests the super reach expectation, when the giant appears, the hold display is likely to change, and when the dwarf appears, the hold display does not easily change, and in the production system that suggests the big hit expectation, the appearing character Instead, the ratio of the pending display to change easily or hard to change may be varied depending on the size of the brush possessed by the appearing character (for example, it is easy to change if it is large and hard to change if it is small).

  In the above embodiment, in the pre-read advance notice effect of the aspect of “hold ball change”, as a step-up notice, a dwarf with low expectation of change appears first, and a giant with high expectation of change appears later. Although the example has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to once branch to an effect whose expectation of change is not set in the process of the step-up notice. For example, in the process of the step-up notice, a character (for example, a Martian) whose expectation of change is completely unknown may appear, and finally, a character (for example, a giant) having a high expectation of change may appear.

  In the above embodiment, after the starting winning combination, the suspension display based on the starting winning combination is temporarily displayed as a normal display (see steps S6017A and S6017B), and is normally displayed immediately after the start of the subsequent fluctuation of the new design symbol An example has been described in which a pre-reading advance notice effect in the form of “hold ball change” is performed on the hold display, and the effect is ended during the fluctuation period. In this case, if the advance notice effect of the aspect of “hold ball change” is executed over a plurality of variable displays, the hold ball is digested during the production, and the position of the hold ball to be notified is shifted. There is a problem that the control for effecting the holding ball is complicated. In the above embodiment, since it is possible to end the effect within the fluctuation period started after the start winning combination without straddling a plurality of fluctuations, the above problem does not occur.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command is compared with the holding ball change presentation time, and the presentation is performed only when the presentation can be ended within the fluctuation period. . Here, in the above embodiment, when the fluctuation time is equal to or less than the holding ball change presentation time, since the effect is carried over to the next fluctuation (see step S8017C), the “holding ball should be executed originally” It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the previewed preview effect of the aspect of “change” is not executed due to the shortening change.

  In the above embodiment, after the starting winning combination, the suspension display based on the starting winning combination is temporarily displayed as a normal display (see steps S6017A and S6017B), and is normally displayed immediately after the start of the subsequent fluctuation of the new design symbol Although an example has been described in which a pre-reading advance notice effect in the form of “hold ball change” is executed for the hold display, and the effect is ended during the fluctuation period, the present invention is not limited thereto, but after step S6017A, S6017B After the display, the previewing notice effect determined in step S6018B or step S6019B may be performed on the normal display immediately (before the start of the next change). In this case, the time until the stop of the variable display is counted, and only when the time until the stop of the variable display when the normal display is performed in S6017A and S6017B is longer than the presentation time, It is preferable to execute the previewing notice effect of the aspect of “hold ball change”.

  In the above embodiment, after the starting winning combination, the suspension display based on the starting winning combination is temporarily displayed as a normal display (see steps S6017A and S6017B), and is normally displayed immediately after the start of the subsequent fluctuation of the new design symbol Although the example which performs pre-reading advance notice production of a mode of "a reserve ball change" to a reserve display was explained, it is not restricted to this but after a predetermined time from the start of change of the above new production design, of "a reserve ball change" The preview advance notice effect of the aspect may be executed.

  Although the above embodiment has described an example in which a new prefetch advance notice effect is not executed when the prefetch notice effect of an aspect other than "hold ball change" is being executed (Y in step S6002), Even if the pre-reading advance notice effect of the aspect other than "" is determined to execute the pre-reading advance notice of the aspect of "hold ball change" in the pre-reading advance notice effect determination processing It is also possible to carry out the pre-reading notice of. For example, even if YES is determined in step S6002, the processing in step S6003 and subsequent steps is performed, and step S6020 is performed only when it is confirmed in step S6012 that the pre-reading advance notice of the form "hold ball change" is not performed. It is also possible to shift to the processing of

  In the above embodiment, in step S6018A, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect system (“color change” or “shape change”) in the case of performing the advance notice announcement of “hold ball change”. The effect system determination random number is extracted at a predetermined timing (for example, upon reception of a command at one of the start winnings), and if the value of the extracted effect system determination random number is even, "color change", odd If it is determined that "shape change" is determined, it may be alternately performed so that the effects of "color change" or "shape change" are not continuously performed, and any of the effect systems is performed. After the game is performed, the lottery may be performed with a low probability that the executed rendering system will occur next time.

  In the above embodiment, it is determined in step S6018C whether or not the holding sphere of a color (for example, red) having a higher degree of expectation than the determined color (for example, blue) is displayed. In the example described in the example of not performing the low advance notice effect (effect to change to blue) in step 6018C, in the case where a holding ball having a shape with high expectation (for example, “split”) is displayed in step 6018C, the expectation is It is possible not to perform a low notice effect (effect to change to blue). In the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not the holding ball having a shape (for example, “break”) having a higher degree of expectation than the determined shape (for example, “does not break”) is displayed in step S6019C. In the case where there is a case where there is no advance notice effect with low expectation (“not broken” effect), but in step 6019 C, a holding sphere of a color with high expectation (for example, red) is displayed. It is also possible not to perform the notice effect with low expectation (“not crackable” effect). As described above, when the effects with high expectation are performed with different effect systems, effects with low expectations may not be performed even with other effect systems. For example, when the production with the highest degree of expectation is performed in one of the production lines, it is preferable to set a standard such that the effects other than the highest degree of expectation in the other production line are not performed.

  In the above embodiment, although the example in which the holding ball is hard to change when the dwarf appears and the holding ball tends to change when the giant appears, the holding ball is displayed when the dwarf appears Is unlikely to change, but if it changes, the expectation is raised (for example, when a dwarf paints the holding ball as in the above embodiment, the jackpot expectation is extremely high and the dwarf broke the holding ball) In some cases, the super reach expectation is made extremely high), and when the giant appears, the holding ball is likely to change, but when it changes, the expectation may be lowered. That is, the degree of change in the pending display may be different from the reliability of the notice.

  In the above embodiment, when the advance notice effect of holding ball change is executed, a specific effect is performed to change the display mode of the holding display (for example, a dwarf or a giant appears and the holding ball is hammered An example of performing the dividing operation or performing the operation of applying a color to the holding ball with a brush has been described. On the other hand, after the variable display of the effect pattern is started, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts to notice that the display result of the variable display indicates the big hit symbol (prefetching advance notice of holding ball change) Unlike the effect, for example, the mini character preview effect set in step S8017D may be executed in the same effect mode as the preview alert effect of the holding ball change. For example, when a big hit symbol is derived and displayed, a dwarf or a giant may appear after the start of the variation of the effect symbol, and the effect of writing the character "super heat" on the display screen with a brush may be performed. In this way, for example, the brush can be, for example, a common presentation mode by which the notice effect that indicates whether the display result will be a big hit symbol and the advance notice effect of the holding ball change are common effects during the change display of the effect pattern. It is impossible for the player to judge whether the advance notice of holding ball change is executed or the advance notice for the display result of the symbol during the change is executed only by seeing the dwarf and the giant having appeared on the screen. And, since it becomes to pay attention to the operation of the subsequent dwarf or the giant, the stage effect can be enhanced. That is, it indicates whether the first hold effect (color change) and the display result of the effect pattern on which the variable display is performed will be a big hit (whether a big hit will occur due to the currently executed change) Common effects from the start of the effect (for example, the appearance of a dwarf or a giant) to a predetermined period (for example, before a dwarf or a giant paints the color of the holding ball with a brush or writes the word "superheat" in the display screen) It is good to make it.

  In the above embodiment, when the advance notice effect of holding ball change is executed, a specific effect is performed to change the display mode of the holding display (for example, a dwarf or a giant appears and the holding ball is hammered An example of performing the dividing operation or performing the operation of applying a color to the holding ball with a brush has been described. On the other hand, after the variable display of the effect design of the effect control microcomputer 100 is started, the effect control microcomputer 100 generates an advance notice effect (predictive notice of holding ball change that indicates whether the variable display involves super reach or not. Unlike the effect, for example, the mini character preview effect set in step S8017D may be executed in the same effect mode as the preview alert effect of the holding ball change. For example, in the case of developing into a super reach, an effect may be performed in which a dwarf or a giant appears after the start of variation of the effect pattern and the enemy character in the display screen is hit with a hammer. As described above, for example, a hammer is held by making the advance notice indicating whether or not to develop into a super reach, and the advance notice notice of holding ball change common during the change display of the effect pattern. It is impossible for the player to judge whether the advance notice of holding ball change is executed or the advance notice indicating the possibility of the development of super reach is executed only by seeing the dwarf and the giant appear on the screen And, since it becomes to pay attention to the operation of the subsequent dwarf or the giant, the stage effect can be enhanced. That is, the second hold effect (shape change) and the start of the effect (for example, the appearance of a dwarf or a giant) indicating whether or not the variable display of the effect pattern develops into a super reach (for example, a dwarf or a giant) It is good to make common the effect until it breaks a holding ball with a hammer or strikes an enemy character in a display screen).

  In the above embodiment, after the pending storage subject to the advance notice effect of the pending ball change is generated (after the start winning is generated), the period until the fluctuation related to the pending memory is started is the effect display device The background screen displayed on the screen 9 may be a predetermined special screen. That is, the effect control microcomputer 100 may display the special screen during a period in which the pre-reading advance notice of the holding ball change is set. Here, the special screen may be made different according to the presentation system of the holding ball change (color change effect or shape change effect). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the holding ball display processing table (see, for example, FIGS. 65 and 66) at the start winning event, and if the effect number relating to the start winning is AXX (color change), It is preferable to display a first special screen (for example, fine weather screen) and display a second special screen (for example, heavy rain screen) if the effect number relating to the start winning combination is BXX (shape change). According to this, when the advance notice effect of holding ball change is executed, the background image is also a special background, and the effect can be enhanced. Also, by making the background image different depending on whether it is the first hold effect (color change) or the second hold effect (shape change), the prefetch notice relates to the big hit expectation compared to the case of the hold ball change alone. It becomes easy for the player to grasp whether it is the one or related to the super reach expectation, and the rendering effect is further enhanced.

  In addition, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is set as a predetermined special screen during a period from when the starting winning is generated to when the fluctuation related to the pending storage based on the starting winning is started as described above. If the change display B immediately after the start winning combination is a shortening change, as shown in FIG. 67, the effect of the holding ball change is carried over to the next change (the change display C), but in the case of the shortening change Because it is possible to display a special screen as well, it is possible to make the background screen a special screen at the time of the variable display B. As described above, it is also possible to execute preview advance notice effects on the special screen prior to the holding ball change. In this case, the player expects that the background image becomes a special screen at the time of the variable display B and the advance notice of holding ball change is executed, and the ball is actually held at the time of the next variable display C. An effect of change will be executed. As such, by sequentially executing the different types of pre-read advance notice effects, the effects can be enhanced and the effects can be enhanced.

  In addition, as described above, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is set as a predetermined special screen during a period from when the starting winning is generated to when the fluctuation related to the pending storage based on the starting winning is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the start prize winning command storage area and determines whether or not the symbol designating command corresponding to the pending storage indicates a big hit, and in the case of showing a big hit, it is pending Both the effect of sphere change (for example, color change) and the effect of special screen (for example, display of fine weather screen) may be performed with high probability. On the other hand, when the symbol designating command corresponding to the hold storage indicates the release, it is preferable that only one of the effect of holding ball change or the effect of the special screen is executed with a predetermined probability.

  In addition, as described above, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is set as a predetermined special screen during a period from when the starting winning is generated to when the fluctuation related to the pending storage based on the starting winning is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the start prize winning command storage area and determines whether or not the variation category command corresponding to the pending storage is a command indicating super reach, and indicates super reach. Alternatively, both the effect of holding ball change (for example, shape change) and the effect of special screen (for example, display of heavy rain screen) may be performed with high probability. On the other hand, when the change category command corresponding to the said pending | holding memory does not show a super reach, it is good to make it perform only one among the production | presentation of holding ball change or the production | presentation of a special screen with a predetermined probability.

  In the above embodiment, after the pending storage subject to the advance notice effect of the pending ball change is generated (after the start winning is generated), the period until the fluctuation related to the pending memory is started is the effect display device The background screen displayed on the screen 9 may be a predetermined special screen. That is, the effect control microcomputer 100 may display the special screen during a period in which the pre-reading advance notice of the holding ball change is set. Here, the special screen may be displayed with a high probability when the display result is a big hit, and may be different according to the big hit type. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the command storage area at start winning at the time of start winning, and determines whether the symbol designation command corresponding to the pending storage indicates 15R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit. The first special screen (for example, fine weather screen) is displayed with a high probability when 15R certainty big hit is shown, and the second special screen (for example, heavy rain screen) is shown with high probability when 2R certainty big hit is shown Good. Also, if there is a 15R probability variation big hit and a rank up bonus, it is judged whether the symbol designation command indicates a 15R probability variation big hit or a rank up bonus, and if it shows a 15R probability variation big hit, the first special screen ( For example, a fine weather screen may be displayed with a high probability, and a second special screen (for example, a heavy rain screen) may be displayed with a high probability when showing a rank-up bonus. In addition, when there are a plurality of special variable winning ball devices (for example, two of the special variable winning ball devices A and B) and different special variable winning ball devices are opened according to the type of the big hit, the symbol specifying command is It is determined whether to show a big hit A with the opening of the special variable winning ball device A or a big hit B with the opening of the special variable winning ball device B, and when showing a big hit A, the first special screen (for example, a fine weather screen ) May be displayed with a high probability, and a second special screen (for example, a heavy rainfall screen) may be displayed with a high probability when showing a big hit B.

  In the above embodiment, when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the variation display unit (the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b), a predetermined symbol determination stop time (for example, Time for 0.5 seconds to make the big hit symbol stop displaying the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b), and the effect accompanying the transition to the specified gaming state (big hit gaming state) such as fanfare effect etc. The special variable winning ball device 20 is opened after being executed and is controlled to the specific gaming state. That is, the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variation display unit, and the gaming machine controlled to the specific gaming state after a predetermined time has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variation display part, the specific gaming state is further based on the game ball having passed through a specific area (for example, a specific winning opening or gate) provided in the gaming area. It may be a gaming machine controlled by With such a gaming machine, it also becomes possible for the player to control the start time of the specific gaming state. For example, even if the ball breakage occurs after the derivation display of the specific display result, the opening of the big winning opening is not started immediately, so the player refills the ball and fires it in the game area (passes the specific area) It becomes possible to secure time.

  In addition, a gaming machine having such a specific area has a plurality of specific areas, and a specific gaming state of a different type (for example, different number of rounds) depending on which specific area the game ball has passed through It may be controlled to For example, when there are three specific areas A to C, when the game ball passes the specific area A, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of 15R, and when the game ball passes the specific area B, a big hit game of 10R It may be controlled to the state, and when the game ball passes the specific area C, it may be controlled to the big hit game state of 2R. Further, in the gaming machine having such a specific area, a lottery may be performed to determine the jackpot type based on the passage of the gaming ball through the specific area. For example, the jackpot type determination random number may be extracted at the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the game may be controlled to the number of rounds of big hit according to the extracted random number value. Furthermore, a gaming machine having such a specific area has a plurality of specific areas, and a lottery is performed to determine the jackpot type based on the game ball having passed through any of the specific areas. It is good. For example, when there are three specific areas A to C, a random number for big hit type determination is extracted at the timing when the game ball passes through any of the specific areas, and 80 when the game ball passes through the specific area A Determine the jackpot type with reference to the table determined to be the jackpot of 10R at a rate of 15R at a rate of 20%, and determine the jackpot type with a game ball passing a specific area B at a rate of 20% 15R for a rate of 80% Determine the jackpot type with reference to the table determined to be the jackpot of 10R at a rate of 2R when the gaming ball passes the specific area C, and decide the jackpot of 15R at a ratio of 50% and a ratio of 50% The type of the big hit may be determined with reference to the table to be played. That is, the drawing ratio of the number of rounds may be varied according to which specific area the game ball passes.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd start winning opening 20 special variable winning ball device 31 game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Effect control board 100 Microcomputer for effect control 101 CPU for effect control
109 VDP

Claims (2)

It is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display based on establishment of the start condition, and capable of shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Holding storage means for storing, as a holding storage, information on a variable display for which the start condition is not established;
A determination unit that determines whether or not the variable display has a predetermined result before the start condition is established, and whether the variable display has a predetermined pattern;
Holding display control means for displaying the holding display corresponding to the holding storage in a predetermined display mode;
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the determination regarding the first advance presentation effect for informing that there is a possibility of the predetermined result and the second announcement effect for informing that there is a possibility for the predetermined pattern Preview generation executing means to be executed before the start condition of the variable display subjected to the determination by the means is established;
The preview effect execution means is:
Regarding the fluctuation display performed before the start condition of the fluctuation display which is the target of the judgment by the judgment means is satisfied, whether or not a period from the start to the end of the fluctuation display satisfies a predetermined condition or not When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first holding effect is executed on the holding display of the normal mode corresponding to the variable display targeted for the judgment by the judging means, and the display mode of the holding display is the normal mode Perform the effect to change from the first display mode to the first display mode as the first advance effect,
Performing a first suggestion effect that suggests that the first preview effect is to be executed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and performing the first preview effect in a variable display that satisfies a predetermined condition to be executed thereafter Is possible,
Regarding the fluctuation display performed before the start condition of the fluctuation display which is the target of the judgment by the judgment means is satisfied, whether or not a period from the start to the end of the fluctuation display satisfies a predetermined condition or not When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second holding effect is executed on the holding display of the normal mode corresponding to the variable display targeted for the judgment by the judging means, and the display mode of the holding display is the normal mode Perform the effect to change from the second display mode to the second display mode as the second advance effect,
Performing a second suggestion effect that suggests that the second preliminary effect is to be performed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and performing the second preliminary effect in a variable display that satisfies a predetermined condition to be performed thereafter Is possible,
Even if the first hold effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not change to the first display mode.
Even if the second hold effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not change to the second display mode.
A game machine characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
Determination information capable of specifying at least one of whether or not the predetermined result and the predetermined pattern are obtained before the start condition is satisfied, and pending storage information indicating that the pending storage has increased Information transmitting means for transmitting;
Even when the determination information is properly received, the first preview effect and the first notification effect can be obtained when the pending storage information including at least the pending storage information can not be normally received. 2) An effect limiting means for restricting the execution of the advance effect,
A game machine characterized by

Images